JP7222520B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed, and generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result.

A variable display device capable of executing a special figure variation display game that variably displays special figure identification information based on the winning of a game ball into a starting winning slot, and a plurality of decoration identification information corresponding to the special figure variation display game. A decoration variation display device capable of executing a decoration variation display game that performs a variation display, a game control device that controls the game as well as the special figure variation display game, and a control signal from the game control device , and an effect control device for controlling the decoration variation display game, and when the stop result mode of the special figure variation display game becomes a predetermined special result mode, a game value can be given to the player. In gaming machines, there is known a gaming machine provided with variation pattern selection means for selecting a variation pattern corresponding to a plurality of types of reach variation as the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game (see Patent Document 1, for example). That is, gaming machines capable of executing multiple types of ready-to-win effects are known.

JP 2014-138827 A

By the way, it was not possible to sufficiently enhance the appeal of the reach production.
An object of the present invention is to enhance the interest of ready-to-win effects.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1,
A gaming machine capable of executing a game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information and generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result,
Variation pattern selection means for selecting a variation pattern of the game;
a variation effect means for executing a variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means;
The variable effect means is capable of executing a first ready-to-reach effect, a second ready-to-reach effect, and a third ready-to-reach effect,
The variation pattern selection means is
A first pattern in which the second ready-to-win effect is executed after the first ready-to-win effect is executed, and the third ready-to-win effect is executed after the second ready-to-win effect is executed;
A second pattern of executing the third ready-to-reach effect without executing the second ready-to-reach effect after executing the first ready-to-reach effect;
A third pattern for executing the third ready-to-reach effect without executing the first ready-to-reach effect and the second ready-to-reach effect,
It is possible to select a fourth pattern in which the second ready-to-win effect is executed without executing the first ready-to-win effect and the third ready-to-win effect is not executed after the second ready-to-win effect is executed,
The degree of expectation that the result of the game will be a special result is different in the first pattern, the second pattern, the third pattern, and the fourth pattern ,
The degree of expectation of the third pattern is set higher than that of the first pattern, and the degree of expectation of the fourth pattern is set lower than that of the first pattern.

According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the interest of the ready-to-win effect.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. 1 is an exploded perspective view and a side view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a figure explaining a lower tray unit. It is a figure explaining a lower tray unit. It is a figure explaining a front frame unit. It is a figure explaining a front frame unit. It is a figure explaining a front frame unit. It is a figure explaining a speaker decoration. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a hitting ball launching device and a foul ball catching unit; It is a figure explaining a hitting|hit_ball launcher. It is a figure explaining a foul ball catching unit. It is a figure explaining a foul ball catching unit. It is a figure explaining a foul ball catching unit. It is a figure explaining an upper tray unit. It is a figure explaining a production|presentation button. It is a figure explaining a unit main-body part. It is a figure explaining a water storage mechanism. It is a figure explaining a water storage mechanism. It is a figure explaining a water storage mechanism. It is a figure explaining a water storage mechanism. It is a figure explaining a visual recognition window part. It is a figure explaining a visual recognition window part. It is a figure explaining a front frame light-emitting unit. It is a figure explaining a front frame light-emitting unit. It is a figure explaining a front frame light-emitting unit. It is a figure explaining a spherical channel unit. It is a figure explaining a spherical channel unit. It is a figure explaining a spherical channel unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the operation|movement aspect in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the operation|movement aspect in a special game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of a game state. 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart explaining probability setting change/confirmation processing. It is a figure explaining the display in a performance display apparatus. It is a flow chart explaining a start opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure starting mouth switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flow chart explaining a look-ahead big hit determination process. It is a flow chart explaining special figure 1 game processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 game processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 game processing. It is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 1 normal processing. It is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 2 normal processing. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart explaining fall lottery processing. It is a flowchart explaining big-hit flag 1 setting processing and big-hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining big-hit determination processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit determination processing. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 1 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 2 stop design setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 information setting processing. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 2 variation pattern setting process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fluctuation start information setting processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining a time reduction variation number update process; FIG. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 1 fluctuation. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 2 fluctuation. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 1 display. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 2 display. It is a flow chart for explaining processing during special figure 2 display. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare/interval processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare/interval processing; FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the big-hit end setting process 1 and the big-hit end setting process 2. FIG. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end setting processing 3. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a small hit fanfare. It is a flow chart for explaining special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing of a production control device. 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command analysis processing; It is a figure explaining an example of the look-ahead effect. It is a figure explaining an example of reach production|presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of reach production|presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of reach production|presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of reach production|presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of reach production|presentation.

<First embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a front side perspective view of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment has a front frame 12, and the front frame 12
is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. Game board 30 (see FIG. 30)
are housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12 . Also, the front frame (
A glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the main body frame) 12 .

Above the glass frame 15, a model name display section 16 for displaying the model name of the gaming machine 10 is provided.
In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right of the glass frame 15 to decorate and produce, and to notify when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are changed to an abnormality notification color (for example, red ), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effects). Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 as well. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the details of the abnormality are notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. It should be noted that a lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15 for announcing abnormal dispensing.

Further, in the lower part of the glass frame 15, an upper tray (storage tray) 21 for supplying game balls to a ball shooting device 240 (see FIG. 10), and a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10. An upper dish ball outlet 22 or the like from which the game balls flow out is provided. Further, the upper edge of the upper tray 21 is provided with a production button 25 containing a production button switch 25a (see FIG. 32) for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. The effect button 25 also includes a drive source (a vibration motor 251a (see FIG. 16), which is a type of frame effect device) for vibrating the effect button 25. As shown in FIG. That is, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a vibration function of making a predetermined notification by vibrating the effect button 25 . In addition, production button 2
5 may be configured to be convertible from a normal state (the state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2) to a projected state (a state in which the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25 is higher than in the normal state).

In the lower part of the front frame 12, there are provided a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing the game balls put out with the upper tray 21 full, an operation section 24 of a ball shooting device 240, and the like. Furthermore, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 .

On the right side of the effect button 25 is a lending button (ball lending button) 27a which is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine. a return button (discharge button) 27b to be operated, a balance display (balance display unit) 27c to display the balance of the prepaid card, and an upper tray operation lever to be operated to flow down the game balls in the upper tray 21 to the lower tray 23 27d, a mobile terminal placement section 28 or the like for placing a mobile terminal such as a smart phone owned by the player is provided. Further, to the left of the effect button 25, a volume control button 27e, a cross key 29, and the like are provided.
In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24 , the batted ball shooting device 240 shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 to the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30 .
shoot towards. In addition, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the cross key 29, a variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 30)
, it is possible to perform an effect or the like in which the player's operation is intervened.

3(a) is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 3(b) is a left side view of the gaming machine 10. FIG.
For example, as shown in FIG. 3(a), the front frame 12 includes an inner frame unit 12a and a lower tray unit 12b attached to the front lower portion of the inner frame unit 12a. Further, the glass frame 15 includes a front frame unit 15a and a top unit 15b mounted on the upper part of the front side of the front frame unit 15a.

Among the parts surrounding the game board 30 of the front frame unit 15a, the lower part 15a1 (upper plate 21
), the left side portion 15a2 and the right side portion 15a3 are formed of black members.
During the game, the player pays attention to the game board 30 (especially the display device 41 and the prize-winning slot), but at that time, since the part surrounding the game board 30 is also visible, a low-brightness color is selected as the color of that part. By doing so, it is possible to alleviate the feeling of oppression given to the player by the game board 30 (including the portion surrounding the game board 30).

Further, by selecting a low-brightness color as the color of the portion surrounding the game board 30, the low-brightness portion can be used to light-emitting devices (for example, the board decoration device 46) provided on the game board 30 and the glass frame 15 provided on the glass frame 15. Since it can be separated from the light emitting device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 etc.)
It is possible to make the light emission of the light emitting device provided on the glass frame 15 stand out. Further, when the effect button 25 is configured to be convertible to the projecting state, the effect button 25 overlaps the lower portion 15a1 in the front-rear direction when it is in the projecting state. That is, when the effect button 25 is in a projecting state, the appearance of the low-brightness portion changes, so that it is possible to prevent overlooking the state change of the effect button 25 . The color of the portions surrounding the game board 30 (the lower portion 15a1, the left portion 15a2, and the right portion 15a3) is not limited to black as long as it has a low brightness.

A model name display section 16 is provided on the front surface of the top unit 15b. The model name display section 16 is configured by sandwiching a sheet on which the model name is displayed between a clear cover that protects the front surface (display surface) of the sheet and a base member, and only the sheet can be replaced. You can change the model name with . Therefore, since there is no need to change the entire top unit 15b for each model, costs can be reduced.
It should be noted that the top unit 15b, which alleviates the feeling of oppression given to the player by the top unit 15b,
From the viewpoint of enhancing the effect of b, for example, the top unit 15b may be configured to perform a predetermined motion such as a forward/backward moving motion or a vertical moving motion.

For example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the front side of the top unit 15b is slanted so that the upper end is positioned further forward than the lower end. That is, the top unit 15b faces the player seated in front of the gaming machine 10 . As a result, the top unit 15b can be made to appear larger, so that the presentation effect of the top unit 15b can be enhanced.
The degree of forward projection of the upper portion of the gaming machine 10 is substantially the same as the degree of forward projection of the lower portion of the gaming machine 10. More specifically, as shown in FIG. The degree is slightly larger than the degree of protrusion of the lower part. The degree of protrusion of the upper portion may be smaller than the degree of protrusion of the lower portion. By configuring in this way, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of the player bumping his or her head against the top unit 15b. Become.

<Lower plate unit>
FIG. 4(a) is a perspective view of the lower tray unit 12b as seen from the front right side, and FIG.
It is the perspective view which looked at the lower tray unit 12b from the front left side. FIG. 5(a) shows the lower tray unit 12.
5B is a plan view of FIG. 5B, and FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG.
) is an enlarged view of a main part in FIG. 5(b).
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(a), a call button 27f is provided on the left side of the lower tray 23 for the player to call a store clerk. When the call button 27f is operated, a signal is transmitted as external information to a data lamp in the amusement arcade, and the data lamp lights up.

For example, as shown in FIG. 4(b), a downstream portion 231 of the flow path through which game balls flow down from the payout unit to the lower tray 23 and the flow path through which game balls flow down from the upper tray 21 to the lower tray 23 are The upper surface is covered with a cover member 231a. The downstream part 231 also serves as a storage space for storing game balls when the lower tray 23 is full.
The cover member 231a is a transparent member, and when the surface is damaged, it turns whitish. If a foul ball is used to cheat (second cheating to be described later), the thread member rubs against the cover member 231a and the surface of the cover member 231a is scratched. It is possible to confirm whether or not fraudulent acts have been performed. Moreover, the cover member 231
Since a is detachably attached to the lower tray unit 12b, only the cover member 213a can be replaced. Therefore, when the cover member 231a is damaged, it is difficult to find a new damage (a new fraudulent act).
If the cover member 231a is damaged, by replacing the cover member 231a, it becomes possible to easily confirm whether or not a new fraudulent act has been committed.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 4(b) and 5(a), the lower tray 23 has a ball discharge opening 232 vertically passing through the bottom surface of the lower tray 23, and an opening/closing door for opening and closing the ball discharge opening 232. 233 and a lower tray ball extracting lever 234 are provided. By operating the lower tray ball extraction lever 234, the opening/closing door 233 is opened, and the game balls in the lower tray 23 can be discharged downward from the ball outlet 232. - 特許庁The ball discharge port 232 has a substantially circular shape when viewed from above and has a diameter D3 (see FIG. 5).
(c) reference) is approximately 35 mm (that is, three times or more the diameter of the game ball). Therefore, the game balls in the lower tray 23 can be smoothly discharged from the ball discharge port 232. - 特許庁

For example, as shown in FIG. 4B, the lower surface inside the lower tray 23 (that is, the upper surface of the bottom surface of the lower tray 23) is inclined toward the ball outlet 232. As shown in FIG. Therefore, even when the number of game balls in the lower tray 23 is small, the game balls in the lower tray 23 can be smoothly discharged from the ball discharge port 232. - 特許庁
Also, the distance D1 (see FIG. 4(b)) between the end (exit) of the downstream portion 231 and the ball discharge port 232 is set to about 9 mm (that is, less than the diameter of the game ball). Therefore, lower plate 2
When the number of game balls in 3 is small, the game balls flowing out from the downstream part 231 are immediately released to the open/close door 2.
33 and stays on the opening/closing door 233, even if the number of game balls in the lower tray 23 is small, the game balls in the lower tray 23 can be smoothly discharged from the ball discharge port 232.例文帳に追加

For example, as shown in FIG. 4B, the left end of the cover member 231a is the terminal end of the downstream portion 231 (
exit), and for example, as shown in FIG.
The left end portion of the portion vertically overlaps a part of the ball discharge port 232 . That is, the downstream part 231
is provided with a canopy projecting toward the ball outlet 232 side. As a result, the upper surface opening of the lower tray 23 is reduced (that is, entry of dust into the lower tray 23 is suppressed) while ensuring the capacity of the lower tray 23 .
Further, as shown in FIG. 5B, for example, the rear surface 23a in the lower plate 23 is inclined such that the lower end is located on the rear side of the upper end. As a result, the capacity of the lower tray 23 is increased without enlarging the top opening of the lower tray 23 .

In addition, since the rear surface 23a in the lower tray 23 is inclined so that the lower end is located on the rear side of the upper end, when the player scrapes out the game ball from the lower tray 23 by hand, the action of scraping is performed. Cheap. Furthermore, for example, as shown in FIG.
is provided. Therefore, when the game ball is scraped out by hand, the stepped portion 235 becomes a space for bending the finger, so that the operation of scraping out becomes easier.

For example, as shown in FIG. 5(c), the distance D21 between the upper surface of the bottom surface of the lower tray 23 and the lower surface of the bottom surface is larger than the diameter of the game ball. 1.5 of the diameter of
It is set to be more than double and less than twice the diameter of the game ball. In addition, in FIG.5(c), the game ball is shown with the two-dot chain line.
Further, the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom surface of the lower tray 23 and the upper surface of the opening/closing door 233 is less than the diameter of the game ball, specifically, for example, about 0.5 times the diameter of the game ball. is set.
Therefore, since the opening/closing door 233 is one step lower than the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower tray 23, the game balls are likely to stay on the opening/closing door 233.例文帳に追加Furthermore, since the step (distance D22) is less than the diameter of the game ball, the game ball on the opening/closing door 233 can be easily scraped out, so that the game ball can be easily taken out from the lower tray 23 .

In addition, since the step (distance D22) is set to about 0.5 times the diameter of the game ball, the game ball caught in the opening/closing door 233 (specifically, the peripheral surface of the ball outlet 232 and the opening/closing door 233 When the game ball sandwiched between the side surface and the side surface of the tray returns upward, it easily returns into the lower tray 23.例文帳に追加That is, if the step (distance D22) is too small, the game ball caught between the opening/closing door 233 may be forcefully pushed out by the closing force of the opening/closing door 233 and jump out of the lower tray 23, but in the case of this embodiment. teeth,
Since the step (distance D22) is set to about 0.5 times the diameter of the game ball, the opening/closing door 233
Even if it is vigorously pushed out by the closing force, it is difficult to cause the inconvenience of jumping out of the lower tray 23, and it is easy to return to the lower tray 23.例文帳に追加

Further, the distance D23 between the lower surface of the bottom surface of the lower tray 23 and the lower surface of the opening/closing door 233 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball, specifically, for example, about 1.5 times the diameter of the game ball. is set.
Therefore, when the opening/closing door 233 is opened and the game balls in the lower tray 23 are discharged from the ball discharge port 232, the game balls are guided downward by the ball discharge port 232 (toward the ball box below). can be done. Furthermore, when a game ball caught in the opening/closing door 233 is ejected downward, even if it is pushed out vigorously by the closing force of the opening/closing door 233, it does not easily scatter (the scattering direction is restricted by the ball outlet 232). It is difficult to cause the inconvenience of falling.

Thus, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the storage portion (lower tray 23) capable of storing game balls
, the storage section includes a through hole (ball outlet 232) for discharging the stored game balls, an opening/closing member (opening/closing door 233) for opening and closing the through hole, and with
A distance D23 between the lower surface of the bottom surface and the lower surface of the opening/closing member is longer than the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom surface and the upper surface of the opening/closing member (see FIG. 5(c)).
Therefore, the usability of the storage portion (lower tray 23) can be improved. in particular,
Since the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom portion and the upper surface of the opening/closing member is shorter than the distance D23 between the lower surface of the bottom portion and the lower surface of the opening/closing member, when the game ball in the storage portion is taken out by hand, the storage portion A game ball that is stuck in the step (distance D22) between the upper surface of the bottom surface and the upper surface of the opening/closing member (opening/closing door 233), that is, the game ball on the opening/closing member can be easily scraped out, which is convenient. In addition, when the number of game balls in the reservoir is small, the game balls accumulate on the opening/closing member. can be discharged smoothly from In addition, since the distance D23 between the bottom surface of the bottom surface and the bottom surface of the opening/closing member is longer than the distance D22 between the top surface of the bottom surface and the top surface of the opening/closing member, the game balls in the reservoir are ejected from the through hole. In addition, the through hole can guide the game ball downward, which is convenient.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom portion and the upper surface of the opening/closing member (opening/closing door 233) is less than the diameter of the game ball, and the lower surface of the bottom portion and the lower surface of the opening/closing member The distance D23 between can be configured to be equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to further improve the usability of the storage portion (lower tray 23). Specifically, since the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom portion and the upper surface of the opening/closing member (opening/closing door 233) is less than the diameter of the game ball, when the game ball in the reservoir is taken out by hand, the The difference in level (distance D22) between the upper surface of the bottom surface and the upper surface of the opening/closing member (opening/closing door 233) does not hinder the action of raking out the game ball, and is easy to use. In addition, since the distance D23 between the lower surface of the bottom surface and the lower surface of the opening and closing member is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball, when the game ball in the reservoir is discharged from the through hole (ball discharge port 232), the through hole The game ball can be guided downward with high accuracy, and is easy to use.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine provided with the storage portion (lower tray 23) capable of storing game balls, the storage portion stores the stored game balls in the bottom portion of the storage portion. A through hole (ball discharge port 232) for discharging the ball and an opening/closing member (opening/closing door 233) for opening and closing the through hole are provided, and the width of the through hole (diameter D3 of the ball discharge port 232) is opened and closed with the upper surface of the bottom part. Distance D between the upper surface of the member
22 (see FIG. 5(c)).
Therefore, the usability of the storage portion (lower tray 23) can be improved. in particular,
Since the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom portion and the upper surface of the opening/closing member is smaller than the width of the through hole (the diameter D3 of the ball discharge port 232), when the game ball in the storage portion is taken out by hand, the bottom surface of the storage portion A game ball stuck in the step (distance D22) between the upper surface of the part and the upper surface of the opening/closing member (opening/closing door 233), that is, the game ball on the opening/closing member can be easily scraped out, which is convenient. In addition, when the number of game balls in the reservoir is small, the game balls accumulate on the opening/closing member. can be discharged smoothly from In addition, since the width of the through-hole (the diameter D3 of the ball discharge port 232) is larger than the distance D22 between the upper surface of the bottom surface and the upper surface of the opening/closing member, the game balls in the reservoir can be smoothly discharged from the through-hole. and easy to use.
In this embodiment, the sphere discharge port 232 has a substantially circular shape when viewed from above.
The shape of the ball discharge port 232 can be changed as appropriate, and for example, it may have a substantially elliptical shape when viewed from above and below. When the ball discharge port 232 has a substantially elliptical shape, for example, the minor axis of the ball discharge port 232 corresponds to the width of the through hole.

<Front frame unit>
FIG. 6(a) is an exploded perspective view of the front frame unit 15a, and FIG. 6(b) is a back view (rear view) of the front frame unit 15a. FIG. 7 is a side sectional view of the front frame unit 15a.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, the front frame unit 15a includes a front frame main body 151 and speaker decorations attached to the upper left and right upper front sides of the front frame main body 151, respectively. 1
52, an upper plate unit 153 attached to the lower part of the front side of the front frame main body 151, a front frame light emitting unit 154 attached to each of the left and right parts of the front side of the front frame main body 151, A cover member 155 is attached to each of the upper left portion and the upper right portion on the rear surface side of the front frame main body portion 151 .

For example, as shown in FIG. 6(a), at the upper left and upper right parts on the front side of the front frame main body 151,
An upper speaker 19a is attached to each. The left upper speaker 19a is attached in an inclined state so that the upper end is located forward from the lower end and the left end is located forward from the right end. The right upper speaker 19a is attached in an inclined state so that the upper end is located forward from the lower end and the right end is located forward from the left end. That is, both the left and right upper speakers 19a are attached in a state in which the sound radiated from the front side thereof is inclined downward and inward.

The upper speaker 19a is covered with a speaker decoration 152 from the front. That is, the speaker decoration 152 prevents the sound from the upper speaker 19a from being directly transmitted to the player. Specifically, the sound radiated from the front side of the upper speaker 19a is reflected by the speaker decoration 152 toward the cover glass 14, for example, as indicated by the dashed line in FIG. It is reflected toward the player sitting in front of 10. Therefore, when the sound from the upper speaker 19a is high-pitched, the player may feel uncomfortable if the sound is directly transmitted to the player. Discomfort can be reduced and interest increases. In addition, when the sound (particularly low-pitched sound) from the upper speaker 19a collides with the cover glass 14, it sounds as if the sound is output from the entire cover glass 14, which enhances interest. Furthermore, since the speaker decoration 152 can restrict the sound from the upper speaker 19a from leaking to the outside, the sound from the upper speaker 19a can be easily heard, and the interest increases.

For example, as shown in FIG. 7, the lower part of the rear side of the upper speaker 19a is covered with the cover glass 1.
away from 4. Therefore, the sound radiated from the lower part of the rear side of the upper speaker 19a is
For example, as indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. Therefore, not only the sound radiated from the front side of the upper speaker 19a but also part of the sound radiated from the rear side of the upper speaker 19a can be transmitted to the player, so that the volume can be suppressed.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 6B and 7, the upper speaker 19a is mounted on the cover member 1 from behind.
55, the sound radiated from the rear side of the upper speaker 19a is blocked by the cover member 15.
5 can be trapped inside. Therefore, the sound from the upper speaker 19a is
It is possible to suppress the backward leakage of 0.
Further, by running the wiring from the upper speaker 19a on the outer surface of the cover member 155, the wiring from the upper speaker 19a can be kept away from the cover glass 14, so that the cover glass 14 can be easily attached and detached. Furthermore, the cover member 155 also serves to prevent fraudulent acts such as piano wires or the like from entering the game machine 10 through the gaps between the upper speaker 19 a and the glass frame 15 . In addition, in FIG.6(b), illustration of the upper speaker 19a is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the game machine 10. FIG. FIG. 9(a) shows the speaker decoration 152 on the right side.
9(b) is a perspective view of the right speaker decoration 152 as seen from the front left side.
For example, as shown in FIG. 8, a top light emitting portion 15b1, which is a kind of frame decoration device 18, is provided on the right side of the top unit 15b. A top light-emitting portion 15b1, which is a type of the frame decoration device 18, is similarly provided on the left side of the top unit 15b. By emitting light from the top light emitting portion 15b1, it is possible to appeal to a player who is on the side of the gaming machine 10 (such as an island entrance of a game arcade).

For example, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 9(a) and (b), the speaker decoration 152 is provided with a diffuse reflection portion 152a that diffusely reflects light, and an upper reflection portion 152b and a lower reflection portion 152c that reflect light. It is
For example, as shown in FIGS. 9(a) and 9(b), the irregular reflection portion 152a has a random uneven surface, and light is diffusely reflected by the uneven surface to be emitted rearward from the top light emitting portion 15b1. The reflected light can be reflected forward or toward the upper reflecting portion 152b or the lower reflecting portion 152c.

In addition, the upper reflecting portion 152b includes a plurality of first reflecting surfaces that reflect light relatively forward,
It has a plurality of second reflecting surfaces that reflect light relatively rearward, and the light from the top light emitting portion 15b1 (the light from the top light emitting portion 15b1 is reflected by the first and second reflecting surfaces). (including light incident through the irregular reflection portion 152a). The first reflecting surface and the second reflecting surface are alternately arranged, the first reflecting surface faces forward from the second reflecting surface, and the width W1 of the first reflecting surface is equal to the width of the second reflecting surface is approximately the same as
In addition, the lower reflecting portion 152c includes a plurality of third reflecting surfaces that reflect light relatively forward,
It has a plurality of fourth reflecting surfaces that reflect light relatively rearward, and the light from the top light emitting portion 15b1 (the (including light incident through the irregular reflection portion 152a and/or the upper reflection portion 152b). The third reflecting surface and the fourth reflecting surface are alternately arranged, the third reflecting surface faces forward from the fourth reflecting surface, and the width W2 of the third reflecting surface is the width of the fourth reflecting surface is approximately the same as

Since the lower reflecting portion 152c is farther from the top light emitting portion 15b1 than the upper reflecting portion 152b, the amount of light incident on the lower reflecting portion 152c is smaller than the amount of light incident on the upper reflecting portion 152b. Therefore, the width W2 of the third reflecting surface of the lower reflecting portion 152c is equal to the width of the upper reflecting portion 152b.
, the amount of light reflected forward by the lower reflecting portion 152c is smaller than the amount of light reflected forward by the upper reflecting portion 152b. 152c looks darker than the upper reflecting portion 152b. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the third reflecting surface of the lower reflecting portion 152c is arranged so that the amount of light reflected forward by the lower reflecting portion 152c and the amount of light reflected forward by the upper reflecting portion 152b are equal to each other. Width W2
is wider than the width W1 of the first reflecting surface of the upper reflecting portion 152b. Thus, in this embodiment, the amount of light reflected by the upper reflecting portion 152b and the lower reflecting portion 152c is adjusted by the width of the reflecting surfaces of the upper reflecting portion 152b and the lower reflecting portion 152c.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the lower reflecting portion 152c is arranged so that the amount of light reflected forward by the lower reflecting portion 152c and the amount of light reflected forward by the upper reflecting portion 152b are equal to each other.
and the direction of the first reflecting surface of the upper reflecting portion 152b are different. Specifically, since the third reflecting surface faces outward from the first reflecting surface, light from the outside of the gaming machine 10 (for example, light from an adjacent gaming machine) reaches the third reflecting surface rather than the first reflecting surface. A large amount of light enters the reflective surface.
That is, the lower reflecting portion 152c is configured to compensate for the small amount of incident light from the top light emitting portion 15b1 with the amount of incident light from the outside. Thus, in this embodiment, the amount of light reflected by the upper reflecting portion 152b and the lower reflecting portion 152c is adjusted by the orientation of the reflecting surfaces of the upper reflecting portion 152b and the lower reflecting portion 152c.
Further, the third reflecting surface of the lower reflecting portion 152c is located outside the first reflecting surface of the upper reflecting portion 152b and faces outward from the first reflecting surface of the upper reflecting portion 152b. As a result, the top unit 15b can be made to appear larger when it emits light, so that the presentation effect of the top unit 15b can be enhanced.

<Battered ball launcher and foul ball catch unit>
FIG. 10 is a front view of the inner frame unit 12a and an enlarged view of the lower portion of the inner frame unit 12a.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 10, a batted ball launching device 240 and a foul ball catching unit 210 are attached to the lower portion of the front side of the inner frame unit 12a. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied to a batted ball launching device 240 arranged in the lower part of the front frame 12. - 特許庁A game ball shot by a shooting pestle 241 of a batting ball shooting device 240 is sent to the game area 3 by a shooting rail 242 formed in the lower part of the front frame 12 so as to be inclined from the lower right to the upper left.
2. A game ball shot from the hitting ball launching device 240 is fouled as a foul ball (a game ball that has returned without being hit to the game area 32) as shown by the dashed line in FIG. The lower plate 23 is recovered by the ball catch unit 210
supplied to

For example, as shown in FIG. 10, the batted ball launcher 240 can
has a cutting blade 243 that cuts the string when the ball is fired from the ball shooting device 240.例文帳に追加
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game ball (illegal ball) attached with a thin string (string member) is shot into the game area 32, and the string member is operated from the upper tray 21 to illegally enter a winning slot or the like. There are times when cheating is done to win prizes. As a countermeasure against cheating using such illegal balls, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a cutting blade 243 for cutting the thread member of the illegal balls.

11(a) is a front view of the ball shooting device 240, FIG. 11(b) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device 240, and FIG. 11(c) is a front perspective view of the cutting blade 243. It is a diagram.
For example, as shown in FIG. 11( a ), the ball shooting device 240 has a forward (glass frame 15 side)
A guideway 244 is provided to guide the game balls supplied from the to the launch position. game machine 1
0 has a supply path (not shown) for supplying game balls stored in the upper tray 21 to the hitting ball launching device 240 . That is, the game machine 10 includes a supply path (not shown) provided on the glass frame 15 side and a supply path (not shown) provided on the glass frame 15 side as a path for guiding the game balls stored in the upper tray 21 to the shooting position of the batted ball shooting device 240, and and a guideway 244 provided in the . When the glass frame 15 is closed, the outlet of the supply path and the inlet 244a of the guide path 244 are connected, and the supply path and the guide path 244 are communicated.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b), an inlet 244a of the guide path 244 is provided in a cover member 245 of the hitting ball launching device 240. As shown in FIG. The inlet portion 244a is the cover member 24
5 is formed as an opening passing through in the front-rear direction.
The cover member 245 is provided with a thread guiding portion 246 capable of guiding the thread member of the illegal ball toward the cutting edge portion of the cutting blade 243 when the illegal ball is shot. The thread guide portion 246 is attached to the cover member 24
5 in the front-rear direction, and is cut so as to be connected to the upper part of the left end of the inlet portion 244a of the guideway 244. As shown in FIG. That is, the thread guide portion 246 and the entrance portion 244a are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. The cutting blade 243 is attached to the cover member 245 so that the cutting edge portion is positioned inside the thread guide portion 246 .

For example, as shown in FIG. 11(c), the cutting blade 243 includes a flat base end portion 243a and a flat first flat plate portion connected to the base end portion 243a and extending in the same plane as the base end portion 243a. tip 2
43b, and a flat plate-like second distal end portion 243c connected to the proximal end portion 243a and bent backward from the proximal end portion 243a. The first tip portion 243b and the second tip portion 243c are vertically arranged side by side.
43d is the cutting portion for cutting the thread member of the irregular ball.
A tip surface 243b1 (right side surface) of the first tip portion 243b and a tip surface 2 of the second tip portion 243c
43c1 (right side) is provided in the clearance 24 so as to guide the thread member of the illegal ball to the clearance 243d.
It is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward 3d. The cutting blade 243 is fixed to the cover member 245 while being housed in a housing recess formed on the rear side of the cover member 245 .

In the cutting mechanism configured as described above, when an illegal ball is shot by the hitting ball launching device 240, the thread member of the illegal ball is guided to the cutting blade 243 by the thread guide portion 246, and the cutting blade 243 bite into the gap 243d. Then, the thread member that has bitten into the gap 243d is pulled and cut by the momentum of the illegal ball. The thread guiding portion 246 is cut at the end of the entrance portion 244a of the guide path 244 so as to be connected to the entrance portion 244a of the guide path 244.
3 is arranged at a recessed position of the thread guide part 246, so that the game ball does not interfere with the flow down.
It becomes possible to cut the thread member of the illegal ball.

The launch rail 242 is configured to guide the game ball launched from the launch position to the upper left. The thread guide portion 246 is formed so as to be connected to the left end portion of the entrance portion 244a of the guide path 244, and the cutting edge portion of the cutting blade 243 is arranged so as to face rightward. In this way, the thread guiding portion 246 is provided on the side of the entrance portion 244a in the game ball shooting direction, and the cutting blade 243
By arranging the cutting edge portion in the direction opposite to the game ball launching direction, it is possible to more reliably cut the string member of the illegal ball.

12(a) is a front view of the foul ball catching unit 210, and FIG. 12(b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul ball catching unit 210. FIG. 13(a) is a top perspective view of foul ball catching unit 210, and FIG. 13(b) is a rear perspective view of foul ball catching unit 210. FIG. FIG. 14(a) shows the foul ball catching unit 21.
14(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 14(a), and FIG. 14(c) is an enlarged view of the main part in FIG. 14(b). It is a diagram.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 12(a) and 12(b), the foul ball catching unit 210 comprises a base member 211 and a part member 212 attached to the rear side of the base member 211. As shown in FIG. On the front side of the base member 211, there is provided a warning sign 211a for calling attention to the hook 210a for locking the foul ball catching unit 210 to the inner frame unit 12a.

For example, as shown in FIG. 13( a ), the foul ball catch unit 210 has a foul ball (a game ball that has flowed backward without being hit into the game area 32 despite being shot) on the rear surface side of the base member 211 . 1st foul ball inflow port 213a and second foul ball inflow port 213b, payout ball inflow port 213c into which game balls paid out with the top tray 21 filled up, inflow port 213a, A ball outflow port 213d for discharging game balls that have flowed into 213b and 213c to the outside of the foul ball catching unit 210 is provided.
The game balls discharged from the ball outlet 213d are supplied to the lower tray 23. As shown in FIG.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14(a), for example, the foul ball catching unit 210 includes a first flow path 214a through which game balls flowing into the first foul ball inlet 213a flow down on the rear surface side of the base member 211; The second flow path 214b through which the game balls that have flowed into the payout ball inlet 213c flow down
, a third flow path 214c that guides game balls that have passed through the first flow path 214a or the second flow path 214b to the ball outlet 213d, and a game ball that has flowed into the second foul ball inlet 213b to the ball outlet 21
and a fourth flow path 214d leading to 3d.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12A, the base member 211 is provided with a window portion 211b for preventing static electricity from staying. The window portion 211b is an opening that penetrates the base member 211 in the front-rear direction.
A game ball in a flow path provided on the rear side of 11 can be visually recognized.
Further, as shown in FIG. 12(b), for example, on the front side of the base member 211, a reinforcing rib 211 for reinforcing the base member 211 is provided with a flow path through which game balls flow down on the rear side.
c is projected. This reinforcing rib 211c also has a role of preventing sink marks during molding.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12(b), the part member 212 has a protrusion 21 protruding upward.
2a and a reinforcing rib 212b against the protrusion 212a.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 13(a) and 14(a), the protrusion 212a is arranged between the first foul ball inlet 213a and the second foul ball inlet 213b. The second foul ball inlet 213b is located on the right side of the first foul ball inlet 213a (on the side of the batted ball launcher 240).
, the foul ball that fails to pass over the protrusion 212a at the time of launch flows into the second foul ball inlet 213b. On the other hand, if a foul ball that has passed over the protrusion 212a during launching cannot pass over the protrusion 212a during reverse flow, it will flow into the first foul ball inlet 213a, and will also pass over the protrusion 212a during reverse flow. When it is possible, it flows into the second foul ball inlet 213b.

For example, as shown in FIG. 13(b), the foul ball catching unit 210 catches the string when a game ball (illegal ball) with a string attached flows into the first foul ball inlet 213a as a foul ball. A portion 215 is provided.
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, as described above, a game ball (
A fraudulent act (hereinafter referred to as “first fraudulent act”) may be committed by shooting an illegal ball) into the game area 32 and operating the thread member from the upper plate 21 to illegally win a prize. . The first cheating can be avoided by cutting blade 243 of batting ball launcher 240 .

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, two game balls are further connected with a thin string (string member), and after one game ball is shot and intentionally made into a foul ball (that is, intentionally caught a foul ball) After the unit 210 collects it and drops it on the lower tray 23), the other game ball is moved to the game area 32
A cheating act (hereinafter referred to as “second cheating”) may be committed by illegally entering a prize-winning opening or the like by operating the thread member from the lower plate 23 by shooting it inside. The second misconduct is that the hand manipulating the string member is hidden by the lower tray 23, making it difficult to see, or mistaking the action of manipulating the string member as the action of moving the game ball from the lower tray 23 to the upper tray 21. Hard to find for some reason.

In the case of the second fraudulent act, since the momentum of one game ball to be shot first is weak, even if the thread member bites into the gap 243d of the cutting blade 243, it will not be cut. Furthermore, the thread member is cut by the cutting blade 243
Even if it bites into the gap 243d, the thread member comes off from the cutting blade 243 when the other game ball is shot after that. Therefore, the second fraudulent act cannot be avoided with the cutting blade 243 . As a countermeasure against such a second fraudulent act, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment
It has a clamping portion 215 that clamps the thread member of the illegal ball.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 13(b) and 14(b), the sandwiching portion 215 may
1 and a rear protrusion 217 provided on the part member 212 and protruding forward (boundary).
The first flow path 214 a provided on the rear surface side of the base member 211 is the first foul ball inlet 2 .
It is a channel formed so as to guide the game ball that has flowed into 13a to the left and then to guide it downward.
The upstream portion of the first flow path 214a (the portion that guides the game ball to the left) is provided between the base member 211 and the part member 212. When the game ball passes through the upstream portion, the projecting portion 216,
217 (that is, above the clamping portion 215).

Further, the third flow path 214c provided on the rear surface side of the base member 211 is connected to the first flow path 214a.
and the second flow path 214b is formed so as to guide the game ball to the right. The third flow path 214c is provided below the protrusions 216 and 217 (that is, below the pinching portion 215). Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the first foul ball inlet 213a moves to the left above the clamping portion 215, drops from the projecting portions 216 and 217, and then moves to the right below the clamping portion 215. is discharged from the ball outlet 213d.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14B, the sandwiching portion 215 is a slit extending in the left-right direction. Therefore, even when the game ball rolls above the sandwiching portion 215 (flows down the upstream portion of the first flow path 214a), it also rolls below the sandwiching portion 215 (through the third flow path 214c). ), it also flows down along the extending direction of the pinching portion 215 .
For example, as shown in FIG. 14C, the right portion of the front surface of the rear protrusion 217 (the surface facing the front protrusion 216) is the rear surface of the front protrusion 216 (the surface facing the rear protrusion 217). is in contact with On the other hand, the left portion of the front surface of the rear projecting portion 217 is an inclined surface that gradually separates from the front projecting portion 216 . That is, between the left rear surface of the front projection 216 and the left front surface of the rear projection 217, there is a tapered sandwiching portion 215 (gap) with an open left end and a closed right end.
is formed. Therefore, the thread member of the irregular ball can enter from the left end of the clamping portion 215 .
In addition, the tip surface 216a (left side surface) of the front protrusion 216 and the tip surface 2 of the rear protrusion 217
17 a (left side surface) is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the clamping portion 215 so as to guide the thread member of the irregular ball to the clamping portion 215 .

The left portion of the front surface of the rear projection 217 (that is, the inclined surface gradually separating from the front projection 216) is composed of a first inclined surface 217b and a second inclined surface 21 having a gentler inclination than the first inclined surface 217b.
7c.
A first inclined surface 217 b having a steeper inclination is provided on the left end (open end) side of the holding portion 215 . As a result, the front protruding portion 216 and the rear protruding portion 21 are separated from each other at the open end of the sandwiching portion 215 .
7, the thread member of the irregular ball can easily enter the clamping portion 215. As shown in FIG.
A second inclined surface 217 c having a gentler inclination is provided on the right end (closed end) side of the clamping portion 215 . As a result, the length of the portion where the force that pinches the string member of the illegal ball is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold can be lengthened, so that the string member of the illegal ball can be effectively pinched, making it difficult to operate the string member. In addition, it is possible to make recovery of the thread member difficult.

In the clamping mechanism configured as described above, the first illegal ball shot out of the two illegal balls connected by the string member flows down the third flow path 214c through the first flow path 214a as a foul ball. At this time, the thread member enters from the left end of the clamping portion 215 . Then, the thread member that has entered the pinching portion 215 is pulled by the downward force of the irregular ball and is pinched by the pinching portion 215 . Since the sandwiching portion 215 is arranged along the flowing direction of the game ball, it is possible to sandwich the thread member of the illegal ball without hindering the flowing of the game ball.

The first flow path 214a allows the game ball that has flowed into the first foul ball inlet 213a to pass through the sandwiching portion 21.
5, and then supplied to the lower side of the sandwiching section 215. The third flow path 214c feeds the game balls supplied to the lower side of the sandwiching section 215 to the sandwiched portion. It is configured to lead to the right below the portion 215 . The sandwiching portion 215 is arranged so that the open end faces leftward. In this way, the open end of the sandwiching portion 215 is provided in the same direction as the game ball flowing down above the sandwiching portion 215, and in the opposite direction to the flowing direction of the game ball below the sandwiching portion 215. By providing it, it is possible to reliably sandwich the thread member of the illegal ball.

Both the first foul ball inflow port 213a into which the foul ball flows and the ball outflow port 213d from which the foul ball is discharged are arranged on the right side of the open end of the clamping portion 215. is tapered from left to right. Therefore, when one of the previously shot illegal balls flows in from the first foul ball inlet 213a and is discharged from the ball outlet 213d, the string member of the illegal ball is roughly V-shaped in the foul ball catch unit 210. It is in a bent state. As a result, the other end side of the thread member (the side of the other illegal ball) is pulled by shooting the other illegal ball into the game area 32, or the thread member is operated from the lower tray 23. When one end side of the thread member (one side of the illegal ball that became a foul ball) is pulled, the force that moves the portion sandwiched by the pinching portion 215 of the thread member to the right side (closed end side) is generated. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably pinch the thread member of the irregular ball.

Specifically, for example, one of the previously shot illegal balls flows into the string member from the first foul ball inlet 213a and is discharged from the ball outlet 213d, thereby opening the pinching portion 215. , and is sandwiched between the rear surface of the front protrusion 216 and the first inclined surface 217 b of the rear protrusion 217 . Next, when the other illegal ball is shot into the play area 32, the other end of the thread member is pulled by the force of the shot, so that the rear surface of the front protrusion 216 and the first inclined surface of the rear protrusion 217 are pulled. 217 b to a position sandwiched between the rear surface of the front projecting portion 216 and the second inclined surface 217 c of the rear projecting portion 217 , and is sandwiched between the sandwiching portions 215 . After that, the string member is operated from the lower plate 23 so that one end side is pulled.
16 and the second inclined surface 217c of the rear protrusion 217, it moves toward the closed end. Therefore, as the operation from the lower tray 23 of the thread member is repeated, the thread member is gradually pinched by the clamping portion 215, and the thread member eventually stops moving, making it difficult to operate the thread member. In addition, it becomes difficult to recover the thread member. Therefore, since there is a possibility that evidence of the fraudulent act remains, it is possible to effectively avoid the second fraudulent act.

Instead of providing an inclined surface on the front surface of the rear projecting portion 217, it is possible to provide an inclined surface on the rear surface of the front projecting portion 216 to form the sandwiching portion 215. It is also possible to form the pinching portion 215 by providing inclined surfaces on both front surfaces of the rear projection portion 217 . However, when the thread member of the irregular ball is operated from the lower plate 23, the thread member is pressed against the rear surface of the front protrusion 216. Therefore, if an inclined surface is provided on the rear surface of the front protrusion 216, the thread member may be guided in a direction away from the clamping portion 215 . Therefore, in the present embodiment, the inclined surface 2 is formed on the front surface of the rear protrusion 217 without providing the rear surface of the front protrusion 216 with the slope 2 .
A pinching portion 215 is formed by providing 17b and 217c.
In addition, unevenness may be provided on the surface of the foul ball catching unit 210 that contacts the thread member of the illegal ball (for example, the left rear surface of the front protrusion 216 and/or the left front surface of the rear protrusion 217). . As a result, the frictional resistance between the foul ball catching unit 210 and the thread member increases, making it easier for the thread member to get caught, making it possible to effectively avoid the second fraudulent act.

Also, the second cheating using the game ball that has flowed into the first foul ball inlet 213a can be avoided by the pinching portion 215 of the foul ball catch unit 210. FIG. On the other hand, the foul ball may flow into the second foul ball inlet 213b, and the pinching section 215 cannot avoid the second cheating using the game ball that has flowed into the second foul ball inlet 213b.
Therefore, as a countermeasure against the second cheating using the game ball that has flowed into the second foul ball inlet 213b, for example, the rib 211d forming the second foul ball inlet 213b (Fig. 13 (
You may provide a notch in the upper end part etc. of a) reference).

Also, for example, ribs 211e, 211f, and 211g (see FIG. 1) forming the spherical outlet 213d.
3(b)), corners formed by the ribs 211e and 211g, and corners formed by the ribs 211f and 211g. As a result, the thread member of the illegal ball becomes even more difficult to operate, so that it is possible to effectively avoid the second illegal act using the game ball that has flowed into the first foul ball inlet 213a.
In addition, by providing notches in the lower ends of the ribs 211e, 211f, and 211g and in the corners formed by these ribs, the second foul ball inlet 213b can be It is possible to avoid the second fraudulent act using the inflow game ball.
In addition, notches are provided in the lower ends of ribs 211e, 211f, and 211g and corners formed by these ribs, and notches are provided in the upper end of rib 211d, etc., so that the ball flows into second foul ball inlet 213b. It is possible to effectively avoid the second fraudulent act using the game ball.
Also, the second foul ball inlet 213b may not be provided. That is, all foul balls may be configured to flow into the first foul ball inlet 213a.

<Top plate unit>
15(a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper tray unit 153, and FIG. 15(b) is a plan view of the upper tray unit 153. FIG.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 15(a) and 15(b), the upper tray unit 153 may
60, and a performance button 25 attached to the central part of the unit main body part 260 from above. The upper tray unit 153 is installed under the glass frame 15, and the game machine 10
It is configured as a protruding unit that protrudes forward of the
For example, as shown in FIG. 15(a), an opening 2
60a is formed. The opening 260a is for inserting the production button 25 into the unit main body 260, and the lower part of the production button 25 is arranged in the unit main body 260 via the opening 260a.

The effect button 25 can be detachably attached to the unit main body 260 via a shaft portion 25b protruding from the bottom surface of the effect button 25 and a support member 260b protruding from the bottom surface of the unit main body 260. be provided. Each support member 260b of the unit main body 260 is formed at a position corresponding to each shaft 25b of the effect button 25, and the shaft 25b is provided inside.
and the support member 260b.
Also, the support member 260b is configured to incline toward the front side of the game machine 10. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the effect button 25 supported by the support member 260b is also inclined forward of the game machine 10.例文帳に追加As a result, the operation surface of the effect button 25 can be arranged facing the player sitting in front of the game machine 10, and the operability can be improved.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 15(a) and 15(b), on the upper surface of the unit main body 260, there are a lending button (ball lending button) 27a, a returning button (ejection button) 27b, and a balance indicator (balance display section) 27c. , an upper plate operating lever 27d, a portable terminal placing portion 28, a volume adjusting button 27e, a cross key 29, and the like.
The portable terminal placing portion 28 is provided with a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) groove portions 28a. The grooves 28a are arranged at different angles with respect to the horizontal direction. Therefore, the player can stably place the mobile terminal on the mobile terminal placing section 28 by selecting the groove 28a according to the size of the mobile terminal.

16 is an exploded perspective view of the effect button 25. FIG.
For example, as shown in FIG. 16, the effect button 25 includes a button unit base 251, a button lower base 252, a reflector base 253, a reflector 254, a button inner lower lens 255, a button inner upper lens 256, and a button It comprises a lens decoration 257 , a button lens 258 and a button frame 259 . Among these members, the button lens 258, the button lens decoration 257, and the button lower base 252 sink when the production button 25 is pressed.

A vibration motor 251a is attached to the central portion of the button unit base 251, and the production button 25 as a whole vibrates when the vibration motor 251a operates. i.e.
A vibration function for vibrating the production button 25 is achieved by the vibration motor 251a. A production button switch 25a is attached to the button unit base 251. - 特許庁
The button lower base 252 is a member arranged on the upper surface side of the button unit base 251. The base main body portion 252a has a bottomed cylindrical shape with an open upper surface, and the base main body portion 252a protrudes downward from the bottom surface of the base main body portion 252a. and a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) biasing members 252b. The biasing member 252b is, for example, a spring, and its tip extends toward the button unit base 25.
1 and urges the base body portion 252a away from the button unit base 251 (upward).

When the effect button 25 is pressed, the base main body 252a moves in a direction that resists the biasing force of the biasing member 252b. That is, when the effect button 25 is pressed, the base main body 252a moves toward the button unit base 251 (downward). buffer member 25
1b is attached.
A light shielding plate 252c is attached to the bottom surface of the base main body portion 252a. When the effect button 25 is pressed and the distance between the base main body portion 252a and the button unit base 251 becomes equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value, the light shielding plate 252c is displayed. is arranged between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion of the effect button switch 25a attached to the button unit base 251. As shown in FIG. The performance button switch 25a outputs a signal indicating that the performance button 25 has been pressed when the light from the light emitting portion to the light receiving portion is blocked by the light blocking plate 252c.

The reflector base 253 is a substantially annular member that slopes downward toward the central opening 253 a and engages with the button unit base 251 from above the button lower base 252 . The upper surface of the reflector base 253 is subjected to irregular reflection processing (concavo-convex processing) for reflecting light in multiple directions.
The reflector 254 is an inverted truncated conical member with open upper and lower surfaces, and is engaged with the upper button inner lens 256 while being arranged in the lower button inner lens 255 . The surface of the reflector 254 is processed to reflect light.

Inside the base main body portion 252a of the button lower base 252, a plurality of (in this embodiment,
LED board 252d on which 9) LEDs are mounted. One of the LEDs mounted on the LED board 252d is positioned to fit within the bottom opening 254a of the reflector 254, and the remaining LEDs are positioned to fit within the central opening 253a of the reflector base 253. It is arranged at a position surrounding the lower surface opening 254 a of the reflector 254 .
The lower surface opening 254 of the reflector 254 among the LEDs mounted on the LED board 252d
Part of the light from the LEDs arranged in positions within a is directly incident on the button inner upper lens 256, and the rest of the light is reflected by the reflector 254 and enters the button inner upper lens 256. Incident.
Light from the LEDs mounted on the LED board 252d and disposed at a position surrounding the lower surface opening 254a of the reflector 254 is reflected by the reflector 254 and is reflected by the upper surface of the reflector base 253 (diffused reflection processing is applied). ), is reflected by the upper surface, and enters the intra-button lenses 255 and 256 .

The button inner lower lens 255 is a member capable of transmitting light, and is engaged with the reflector base 253 while being disposed within the reflector base 253 .
The button inner upper lens 256 is a member capable of transmitting light, and the button inner lower lens 255
engaged with.
The button lens decoration 257 is a light-permeable member, and is sandwiched between the button lower base 252 and the button lens 258 . The upper surface of the button lens decoration 257 is provided with uneven characters (characters "PUSH" in this embodiment) and patterns.
The button lens 258 is a transparent member that allows light to pass through, and is engaged with the button lower base 252 from above the button lens decoration 257 .
The button frame 259 is a member arranged around the button lens 258 and engaged with the button unit base 251 from above the button lens 258 .

In this way, the button inner lenses 255 and 256, the button lens decoration 257, and the button lens 258 are members capable of transmitting light. Therefore, the light from the LED substrate 252d (that is, the light incident on the button inner lenses 255 and 256)
6, the button lens decoration 257 and the button lens 258, and is emitted to the outside of the production button 25. - 特許庁
Furthermore, since the button lens 258 is a transparent member, the characters and patterns formed by the unevenness provided on the upper surface of the button lens decoration 257 can be visually recognized from the outside of the effect button 25 through the button lens 258 .

17 is an exploded perspective view of the unit main body 260. FIG.
For example, as shown in FIG. 17, the unit main body 260 includes an upper tray base 261, a button fixing member 262 attached to the lower side of the upper tray base 261, and an upper tray mounted to the front side of the upper tray base 261. A frame 263 and an operation panel 2 mounted on the upper surface side of the upper tray frame 263
64, a button base 265 attached to the lower surface side of the upper tray frame 263, a light emitting decorative member 266a attached to the upper tray frame 263, and a light emitting element attached to the upper tray frame 263 corresponding to the light emitting decorative member 266a. and a body member 266b.

The upper plate base 261 is a member forming the upper plate 21 . In addition, the upper plate base 261 has
A mobile terminal placing portion 28 is formed, and a left lower speaker 19b is attached.
The button fixing member 262 is a member for fixing the lending button 27a, the returning button 27b, and the balance indicator 27c to predetermined positions of the operation panel 264. FIG.
The upper tray frame 263 is a member arranged along the front edge of the upper tray 21 . Upright walls 263a are provided at the left front end and the right front end of the upper tray frame 263, respectively. The upright wall 263a is provided with a plurality of (six in this embodiment) through holes 263a1.

The light-emitting decorative member 266a is a member attached to the front side of the upright wall 263a of the upper plate frame 263, and serves to fix the upper plate lens capable of transmitting light and the upper plate lens at a predetermined position of the upright wall 263a. and a lens frame.
The light-emitting main body member 266b is a member attached to the rear surface side of the upright wall 263a of the upper tray frame 263, and includes an LED board and a cover for fixing the LED board to a predetermined position of the upright wall 263a. be done. The light-emitting body member 266b has a plurality of (six in this embodiment) LEDs, and each LED corresponds 1:1 to each through-hole 263a1 of the upright wall 263a. That is, the light from the LED of the light-emitting body member 266b is
The light enters the top lens of the light emitting decorative member 266a through the through hole 263a1 corresponding to D, passes through the top lens, and is emitted to the outside of the unit main body 260. FIG.

The operation panel 264 is a member arranged around the effect button 25 . Operation panel 26
4, a lending button 27a, a returning button 27b, and a balance display 27c are attached to the upper right side of the operation panel 264, and a lending button 27a, a returning button 27b, and a balance display 27c are attached to the lower right side of the operation panel 264. A related board (not shown) is attached. Also, the operation panel 264
A volume adjustment button 27e and a cross key 29 are attached to the left upper surface of the operation panel 264, and a board (not shown) related to the volume adjustment button 27e and the cross key 29 is attached to the left lower surface of the operation panel 264. is installed.
At least the top surface of operation panel 264 can reflect light. Specifically, for example, the surface of the operation panel 264 is a glossy surface. Therefore, since the light emitted from the production button 25 can be reflected by the operation panel 264, the production effect of the production button 25 can be enhanced.
The button base 265 is a member arranged below the production button 25, and the production button 2
5 is provided with a support member 260b. An upper plate operating lever 27d and a reinforcing plate 265a for supporting the operating panel 264 are attached to the upper surface of the button base 265. As shown in FIG.

The upper tray unit 153 has a water storage mechanism for storing the liquid when the presentation button 25 is splashed with liquid such as spilled beverage held by the player.
As described above, the upper tray unit 153 is installed under the glass frame 15 and configured as a projecting unit that projects forward from the gaming machine 10 . Therefore, when a player spills a beverage or the like, there is a high possibility that it will be caught on the upper tray unit 153 . The upper plate unit 153 is provided with a production button 25, and if the production button 25 is damaged by the liquid splashed on the production button 25, the production using the production button 25 (the production that makes the production button 25 emit light, the production, etc.) There is a problem that the effect of vibrating the button 25, the effect of intervening the operation of the effect button 25 by the player, etc.) cannot be executed, and the interest in the game is reduced.
As a countermeasure against such problems, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a water storage mechanism capable of guiding and storing the liquid to a relatively safe place when the effect button 25 is splashed with the liquid. there is

Here, the relatively safe place is a space in the upper tray unit 153 that does not easily affect various electrical components in the upper tray unit 153 even if the liquid is stored. The water storage mechanism of this embodiment is a mechanism for storing liquid inside the upper tray unit 153 . On the other hand, the upper plate unit 153
Vibration motor 251a and LED board 252d and production button switch 25a in production button 25, LED board of light emitting body member 266b, board related to volume adjustment button 27e and cross key 29, these and production control device 300 Various electric parts are arranged, such as a relay board 153a for relaying, a board for the lending button 27a, the return button 27b, and the balance indicator 27c. For this reason, in this embodiment, of the space in the upper tray unit 153, a space that does not easily affect these electrical components even when liquid is stored is used as the water reservoir of the water reservoir mechanism.
The relay board 153a is connected to the production control device 300 among the electric parts arranged inside the upper tray unit 153 (vibration motor 251a, LED board 252d, production button switch 25a, LED board of light emitting body member 266b, board for volume adjustment button 27e and cross key 29, etc.) through connector 153a1. Thus, the wiring space can be reduced by putting together what is connected to the production control device 300 . The relay board 153a is attached to the rear end portion of the button base 265, as shown in FIG. 17, for example. That is, the relay board 153a is connected to the water reservoir (the front water reservoirs 267a, 267a and 267a).
67b (described later), left water reservoirs 268a and 268b (described later), right water reservoirs 269a and 269
b (described later)) on the rear side (upper tray base 261 side).
In addition, the relay board 153a is not only connected to the production control device 300, but also connected to other than the production control device 300 (lending button 27a, return button 27b, balance display 2
7c) may also be connected. This makes it possible to further reduce the wiring space.

18(a) is a front view (front view) of the effect button 25 with the button frame 259 removed, and FIG. 18(b) is a perspective view of the effect button 25 with the button frame 259 removed. FIG. 18C is a plan view (top view) of the effect button 25 with the button frame 259 removed.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 16 and 18(a) to (c), the button lower base 252 has a front guide recess 252e, a left guide recess 252f, and a right guide recess 252g on the outer surface of the base body portion 252a. ing. Further, the button lens 258 is formed by the dome-shaped lens main body portion 25.
A groove 258b is provided along the outer circumference of 8a. Therefore, the liquid splashed on the effect button 25 moves along the surface of the lens body portion 258a to the groove portion 258b.

The liquid in the groove 258b flows along the groove 258b into the guide recesses 252e, 252f, and 2.
Move to 52g. That is, the groove 258b guides the liquid through the recesses 252e, 252f,
This is the taxiway leading to 252g. The effect button 25 is installed in a state inclined to the front side of the game machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, the groove portion 258b (the groove portion 258b on the front side of the dashed line in FIG. 18(c)) is located in front of the left guide recess 252f and the right guide recess 252g.
) is guided to the front guide recess 252e by the groove 258b. Further, the groove portion 258b (see FIG. 18 (
In c), the liquid in the groove 258b) behind the dashed line is guided to the left guide recess 252f or the right guide recess 252g by the groove 258b.

19(a) is a front view of the upper tray unit 153, and FIG. 19(b) is a front view of FIG. 19(a).
19(c) is an enlarged view of the main part in FIG. 19(b).
For example, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 19(b) and (c), the upper tray frame 263 has a front guide step 263b at its front end. The liquid that has moved to the front guide recess 252e of the effect button 25 is guided to the front guide step 263b of the upper tray frame 263 by the front guide recess 252e. That is, the front side guide concave portion 252e directs the liquid to the front side guide step portion 263.
It is an induction port that leads to b. Specifically, the liquid that has moved to the front side guide recess 252e moves from the upper end of the front side guide recess 252e to the front end of the front side guide recess 252e (the front side guide recess 252e).
e), and falls from the front end to the front guide stepped portion 263b.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 18(a) to 18(c), a plurality (three in the present embodiment) of ribs 252e1 are provided in the front guiding recess 252e. The front surface of the rib 252e1, for example, as shown in FIG. 19(c), in the state in which the effect button 25 is normally installed (the gaming machine 10 is tilted forward), the front surface of the rib 252e1 is inclined and substantially orthogonal to the horizontal plane. It's becoming Therefore, the liquid that has moved to the front guide recess 252e can move from the upper end of the front guide recess 252e to the front end of the front guide recess 252e in the shortest distance along the front surface of the rib 252e1. It is possible to smoothly guide the liquid to the guide step portion 263b.

The liquid that has moved to the front guide stepped portion 263b flows into the space (first front water reservoir 267a) formed between the upper tray frame 263 and the operation panel 264 by the front guide stepped portion 263b.
) and accumulates in the first front water reservoir 267a. And the first front water storage part 267
When the water storage amount a reaches the upper limit, the liquid flows from the first front water storage portion 267a into the space (second front water storage portion 267b) formed between the upper tray frame 263 and the button base 265. It moves and accumulates in the second front water reservoir 267b.
That is, the liquid first flows into the first front water storage portion 267a, and after the amount of water stored in the first front water storage portion 267a reaches the upper limit, the liquid flows into the second front water storage portion 267b. Therefore, the first front water reservoir 267a can delay the inflow of liquid into the second front water reservoir 267b (flow of liquid toward the effect button 25).

For example, as shown in FIG. 19(c), when the production button 25 is normally installed,
The front end of the front guide recess 252e (the tip of the top surface of the bottom of the front guide recess 252e) is located forward of the upper end of the front guide stepped portion 263b and located rearward of the front end of the front guide stepped portion 263b. . As a result, the liquid falling from the front end of the front guide recess 252e can reliably flow into the front guide stepped portion 263b. That is, the liquid falling from the front end of the front guide recess 252e does not directly flow into the second front water reservoir 267b.
The inflow of the liquid into the front water storage portion 267b (the flow of the liquid toward the effect button 25) can be reliably delayed.

Furthermore, for example, as shown in FIG. 19(c), when the effect button 25 is normally installed, the bottom lower surface 252e2 of the front guide recess 252e is inclined upward toward the base end side (rear side). As a result, the liquid in the front guide recess 252e can be reliably dropped from the front end of the front guide recess 252e. That is, since the liquid in the front guide recess 252e does not directly flow into the second front water storage section 267b along the bottom lower surface 252e2, the liquid flows into the second front water storage section 267b (toward the effect button 25 side). liquid flow) can be reliably retarded.

20(a) is a plan view of the upper tray unit 153, and FIG. 20(b) is a plan view of FIG. 20(a).
20(c) is an enlarged view of a main part in FIG. 20(b). FIG. 21(a) shows the button base 26 with the reinforcing plate 265a attached.
5, and FIG. 21(b) is a plan view of the button base 265 without the reinforcing plate 265a.
The upper tray unit 153 has a space that does not easily affect various electrical components even when liquid is stored, that is, a space that is used as a water storage portion of the water storage mechanism. It has water reservoirs 269a and 269b. The left water reservoirs 268 a and 268 b and the right water reservoirs 269 a and 269 b are provided inside the button base 265 .

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 20(c), of the space within the button base 265, the space located below the left reinforcing plate 265a is the first left water reservoir 268.
a, and the space located below the right reinforcing plate 265a is the first right water reservoir 269
is a. That is, the portions hatched in FIG. 21(b) are the first left water reservoir 268a and the first right water reservoir 269a.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 20(c), in the space within the button base 265, a space adjacent to the first left water reservoir 268a and located to the right of the first left water reservoir 268a. The space (the space located below the effect button 25) is the second left water storage portion 268b, the space adjacent to the first right water storage portion 269a and the space located to the left of the first right water storage portion 269a ( The space located below the effect button 25) is the second right water reservoir 269b
is. That is, the portions hatched in FIG. 21(a) are the second left water storage portion 268b and the second right water storage portion 269b.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 20(c), the operation panel 264 has a left guide stepped portion 264a and a right guide stepped portion 264b at the edge of the opening 260a. The liquid that has moved to the left guide concave portion 252f of the effect button 25 is guided to the left guide stepped portion 264a of the operation panel 264 by the left guide concave portion 252f. That is, the left guide recess 252f is a guide port that guides the liquid to the left guide stepped portion 264a. Further, the liquid that has moved to the right guiding recess 252g of the effect button 25 is guided to the right guiding step 264b of the operation panel 264 by the right guiding recess 252g. That is, the right guide recess 252g is a guide port that guides the liquid to the right guide stepped portion 264b.

The liquid that has moved to the left guide stepped portion 264a of the operation panel 264 is guided to the first left water reservoir 268a by the left guide step 264a and the left reinforcing plate 265a and accumulates in the first left water reservoir 268a. . When the amount of water stored in the first left water storage portion 268a reaches the upper limit, the liquid moves from the first left water storage portion 268a to the second left water storage portion 268b and enters the second left water storage portion 268b. accumulate.
That is, the liquid first flows into the first left water reservoir 268a, and after the amount of water stored in the first left water reservoir 268a reaches the upper limit, the liquid flows into the second left water reservoir 268b. Therefore, the first left water reservoir 268a can delay the inflow of liquid into the second left water reservoir 268b (flow of liquid toward the effect button 25).

Further, the liquid that has moved to the right guide stepped portion 264b of the operation panel 264 is guided to the first right water storage portion 269a by the right guide step portion 264b and the right reinforcing plate 265a, and then flows into the first right water storage portion 269a. accumulate in When the amount of water stored in the first right water storage portion 269a reaches the upper limit, the liquid flows from the first right water storage portion 269a to the second right water storage portion 269a.
b and accumulates in the second right water reservoir 269b.
That is, the liquid first flows into the first right water reservoir 269a, and after the amount of water stored in the first right water reservoir 269a reaches the upper limit, the liquid flows into the second right water reservoir 269b. Therefore, the first right water reservoir 269a can delay the inflow of liquid into the second right water reservoir 269b (flow of liquid toward the effect button 25 side).
Further, since the button base 265 is inclined forward (see FIG. 19(b)), when the amount of water stored in the second left water storage portion 268b or the second right water storage portion 269b reaches the upper limit, the liquid It moves from the second left water storage portion 268b and the second right water storage portion 269b to the second front water storage portion 267b and accumulates in the second front water storage portion 267b.

The water storage units of the water storage mechanism (front water storage units 267a and 267b, left water storage units 268a and 268b,
The liquid accumulated in the right reservoirs 269a, 269b) evaporates naturally. Moreover, in the case of this embodiment, since various electric parts are provided in the upper tray unit 153, the evaporation of the liquid in the water reservoir can be accelerated by the heat from these parts.
A drain port may be provided so that the liquid in the water reservoir can be discharged to the outside of the gaming machine 10 . Since the lower tray 23 is disposed on the lower left side of the upper tray unit 153, the liquid drainage port is located on the upper tray from the viewpoint of preventing the liquid discharged from the liquid drainage port from flowing into the lower tray 23. It is preferably provided on the right side of the unit 153 . In addition, an opening/closing member that opens and closes the drainage port according to the player's operation may be attached to the drainage port.

In the water storage mechanism configured as described above, the groove portion 258b provided in the button lens 258 of the effect button 25 and the guiding recesses 252e and 252e provided in the button lower base 252 of the effect button 25
By 52f and 252g, the liquid splashed on the production button 25 is not allowed to enter the inside of the production button 25 (the inside of the button unit base 251 to the button lens 258) and is moved to a relatively safe place in the upper tray unit 153. can be induced. Therefore, even if the effect button 25 is splashed with liquid, the effect button 25 is unlikely to break down, so effects using the effect button 25 (effect of lighting the effect button 25, effect of vibrating the effect button 25, effect of the player's effect button 25) It is possible to reduce the occurrence of the inconvenience that the performance that intervenes the operation of ) cannot be executed.

Furthermore, a relatively safe place in the upper tray unit 153 is moved to the second water reservoir (the second front water reservoir 2
67b, second left water reservoir 268b, second right water reservoir 269b) and a first water reservoir (first front water reservoir 267a, first left water reservoir 267a, first left water reservoir 267b) located farther from the effect button 25 than the second water reservoir. 268a and the first right water storage portion 269a), the liquid introduced into the upper tray unit 153 is first stored in the first water storage portion, and then stored in the second water storage portion when the water storage amount of the first water storage portion reaches the upper limit. It can be stored in the department. That is, the first water reservoir can delay the inflow (flow) of the liquid by a predetermined amount (for example, the maximum amount of water stored in the first water reservoir) into the second water reservoir. In this way, by delaying the inflow of the liquid into the second reservoir (the flow of the liquid toward the production button 25) by the first reservoir, the occurrence of the inconvenience that the production using the production button 25 cannot be executed can be prevented. It becomes possible to reduce it reliably.

For example, as shown in FIG. 19(b), an effect button switch 25a is arranged above the second front water reservoir 267b. Therefore, when the amount of water stored in the second front water storage portion 267b reaches the upper limit, there is a possibility that the production button switch 25a will come into contact with the liquid and break down. Further, as shown in FIG. 20C, for example, the second left water reservoir 268b and the second right water reservoir
A vibration motor 251a is arranged above 9b. Therefore, the second left water reservoir 2
When the amount of water stored in 68b or the second right water storage portion 269b reaches the upper limit, there is a possibility that the vibration motor 251a will come into contact with the liquid and break down.
In contrast, in the present embodiment, the first reservoir can delay the inflow of the liquid into the second reservoir. Therefore, during the delay, it is possible to take measures such as wiping off the liquid on the performance button 25 so that the water storage amount of the second water storage unit does not reach the upper limit, so that the performance button switch 25a fails. It is possible to reliably reduce the occurrence of inconveniences such as the inability to execute the performance that intervenes the operation of the performance button 25 by the player, and the failure of the vibration motor 251a to make it impossible to execute the performance that vibrates the performance button 25. becomes.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine having the operating means (upper tray unit 153) having the operating section (effect button 25) that the player can operate, Accordingly, a predetermined effect (for example, a prefetch effect described later) can be executed, and the operation means is
A substrate (e.g., LED substrate 252d) provided inside the operation unit, and a fluid (e.g., liquid)
and a delaying means (first reservoirs 267a, 26
8a, 269a) (see FIGS. 19 and 20). Specifically, the guide means guides the fluid to the delay means, and the delay means is the inner side of the operation section (that is, the second
It delays the flow of fluid to reservoirs 267b, 268b, 269b).
Therefore, even if fluid (for example, liquid) is splashed on the operating part (the production button 25), the operating part is structured so that it is unlikely to break down, so the inconvenience of not being able to execute the production using the operating part is unlikely to occur. , less likely to lose interest.

FIG. 22(a) is a right side view of the front frame unit 15a and is a diagram for explaining the visual recognition window portion 15c, and FIG. 22(b) is an enlarged view of the main part in FIG. 22(a). is. Figure 23 (
23a) is a rear side perspective view of the front frame unit 15a and is a diagram for explaining the visual recognition window portion 15c, and FIG. 23(b) is an enlarged view of the main part in FIG. 23(a). .
For example, as shown in FIGS. 22A and 22B, when the front frame 12 is closed and the glass frame 15 is opened, the visual window portion 15c (between the front frame body portion 151 and the upper tray unit 153) is opened. gap)
The inside of the upper tray unit 153 can be visually recognized from the outside of the glass frame 15 through the .
Since the viewing window portion 15c is provided on the open end (right end) side of the glass frame 15, the right side area inside the upper tray unit 153 is particularly easy to view through the viewing window portion 15c.

For example, as shown in FIG. 17, an upper plate operating lever 27d operated to cause game balls in the upper plate 21 to flow down to the lower plate 23 is provided on the right side of the button base 265. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the portion of the upper tray operating lever 27 d that is disposed inside the upper tray unit 153 (hereinafter referred to as “the base end portion of the upper tray operating lever 27 d ”) is located within the right region inside the upper tray unit 153 . Since it is located, it can be visually recognized through the visual recognition window 15c as shown in FIGS. 22(a) and 22(b). That is, the operation of the upper plate operating lever 27d can be visually confirmed through the visual confirmation window portion 15c.

17, one of the two light-emitting body members 266b is attached to the right upright wall 263a of the upper tray frame 263. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the one light emitting main body member 266b (the right light emitting main body member 266b) is located in the right region inside the upper tray unit 153, so that, for example, as shown in FIGS. , can be viewed through the viewing window portion 15c. Furthermore, when the light-emitting body member 266b on the right side is emitting light, the light leaking from the light-emitting body member 266b brightly illuminates the inside of the upper tray unit 153 (particularly, the right region inside the upper tray unit 153). Therefore, it becomes easier to visually confirm the inside of the upper tray unit 153 (for example, visually confirm the operation of the upper tray operating lever 27d) through the visual recognition window portion 15c.
In addition, when the light-emitting body member 266b on the right side is emitting light, the light-emitting state can be visually confirmed through the visual recognition window portion 15c. It is possible to recognize errors that occur. Specifically, for example, when the light emission mode corresponding to the door open error is red and the light emission mode corresponding to the dispensing error is green,
Whether the light-emitting body member 266b on the right side emits light in red (i.e., only door open error occurs) or yellow (= red + green) (i.e., door open error and payout error). (whether an error has occurred) can be confirmed from the viewing window portion 15c, so that the currently occurring error can be recognized without closing the glass frame 15 for confirmation.

FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the front frame unit 15a.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 6A, 6B, and 24, the front frame unit 15a is attached to the front frame main body 151, and the upper left and right upper front sides of the front frame main body 151, respectively. an upper plate unit 153 attached to the lower part of the front side of the front frame main body 151; and a front frame light emitting unit attached to each of the front left and right parts of the front frame main body 151. 1
54, and cover members 155 attached to the upper left and upper right portions of the rear surface side of the front frame main body portion 151, respectively. The front frame light emitting unit 154 is a kind of frame decoration device 18 .

25 is an exploded perspective view of the right front frame light emitting unit 154. FIG. FIG. 26 shows the LED substrate 181, the reflector 183 and the inner lens 1 in the front frame light emitting unit 154 on the right side.
84 is a diagram for explaining the relationship with . Since the configuration of the left front frame light emitting unit 154 and the configuration of the right front frame light emitting unit 154 are substantially the same, the right front frame light emitting unit 154 will be described here with reference to FIGS. To explain, the left front frame light emitting unit 154
is omitted.
For example, as shown in FIG. 25, the right front frame light emitting unit 154 includes an LED board 181 fixed to the front frame main body part 151 and an LED board 181 arranged in front of the LED board 181 and fixed to the front frame main body part 151. and a transparent back cover 182 disposed in front of the back cover 182 and the back cover 182
a reflector 183 and an inner lens 184 attached to the inner lens 184; a side cover 185 attached to the right of the inner lens 184 and attached to the inner lens 184; and a side cover 185 attached to the left of the inner lens 184. and an outer lens 186 attached to the lens. The outer lens 186 includes the reflector 183 and the inner lens 18
4 is engaged with the reflector 183. Also, the inner lens 184 and the outer lens 186 are fixed to the same position of the side cover 185 .

Of the plurality of LEDs provided on the LED substrate 181, some of the LEDs (the LEDs within the area surrounded by the dashed line in FIG. 25) are LEDs for the reflector 183, and the remaining LEDs are LEDs for the inner lens 184. .
For example, as shown in FIG. 26, a plurality of reflectors 183 (11 in this embodiment)
through holes 183a are provided, and each of the LEDs (eight LEDs in this embodiment) for the reflector 183 provided on the LED substrate 181 is provided in a part of the through holes 183a provided in the reflector 183. (In the case of this embodiment, 8 through-holes 183a).
: 1 corresponds. Therefore, since the LED for reflector 183 is exposed through the through hole 183 a corresponding to the LED, part of the light from the LED for reflector 183 directly enters outer lens 186 .

In addition, the remaining light (light that does not directly enter the outer lens 186) of the light from the LED for the reflector 183 is emitted from the front surface of the reflector 183 (the surface that has undergone a reflective process to reflect light).
is reflected and enters the outer lens 186 .
Since the outer lens 186 is a transparent member, the light from the LED for the reflector 183 that enters the outer lens 186 is transmitted through the outer lens 186 and emitted to the outside of the front frame light emitting unit 154 . Reflector 183 thus allows reflector 18
Since the direct light from the LED for 3 and the indirect light (reflected light) from the reflector 183 can be emitted toward the player side, a more effective light emission effect can be performed.
Also, since the LED for the reflector 183 is exposed through the through hole 183 a of the reflector 183 , it can be seen from outside the front frame light emitting unit 154 through the transparent outer lens 186 .

On the other hand, the LED for the inner lens 184 provided on the LED substrate 181 is covered with the inner lens 184 (the member indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 26) capable of transmitting light. Therefore, the light from the LED for the inner lens 184 passes through the inner lens 184 to enter the outer lens 186 , passes through the outer lens 186 and is emitted to the outside of the front frame light emitting unit 154 .
In addition, the inner lens 184 is a translucent member that allows light to pass therethrough but has low transparency. Therefore, since it is blocked by the inner lens 184 , the LED for the inner lens 184 cannot be seen from the outside of the front frame light emitting unit 154 through the transparent outer lens 186 .

For example, as shown in FIG. 25, the side cover 185 is provided with a plurality of (five in this embodiment) openings, each of which is covered with a translucent inner cover 185a. Therefore, light transmitted through the inner lens 184 (inner lens 184
light from the LED for ) also enters the inner cover 185a, and the light from the inner cover 185a
and emitted to the outside of the front frame light emitting unit 154 . The inner cover 185a is
It is a translucent member that can transmit light but has low transparency. Therefore, the inner cover 1
The inside of the front frame light emitting unit 154 cannot be seen through 85a.

<Spherical channel unit>
FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame 11 viewed from the rear side.
For example, as shown in FIG. 27, on the rear side of the outer frame 11, there are a shooting board 240a for controlling the batted ball shooting device 240, a ball passage unit 220, a payout board (payout control device 200 (see FIG. 31)) and A board unit 11a having a power supply board (power supply device 400 (see FIG. 31)) is provided.

FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the spherical channel unit 220. FIG.
For example, as shown in FIG. 28, the spherical flow path unit 220 includes a spherical flow path unit base 221, a front lid member 222 attached to the front side of the spherical flow path unit base 221, and a rear surface of the spherical flow path unit base 221. and a rear lid member 223 mounted on the side. An out ball detection switch 32a (see FIG. 31) is attached to the front side of the ball flow path unit base 221 to detect all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been shot into the game area 32 and finished playing. ing.

FIG. 29(a) is a rear view (rear view) of the spherical flow path unit base 221, and FIG.
) is a front view (front view) of the front lid member 222 when the front lid member 222 is made transparent.
The game ball paid out from the payout unit flows into the ball passage unit 220 from the inlet 221e (see FIG. 28) provided on the rear side of the ball passage unit base 221, and passes through the ball passage unit base 221. It is discharged out of the spherical flow path unit 220 through an outflow port 221c (see FIG. 28) penetrating in the front-rear direction. The ejected game balls are supplied to the upper tray 21 .
On the other hand, when the upper tray 21 is full, game balls that have flowed into the ball passage unit 220 from the inflow port 221e are placed between the ball passage unit base 221 and the rear lid member 223. It flows down the path and is discharged out of the spherical flow path unit 220 . The ejected game balls are supplied to the lower tray 23 . For example, as shown in FIG.
A put-out ball flow path forming rib 221a that forms the put-out ball flow path protrudes from the rear surface.
An overflow sensor 221b for detecting that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (that the lower tray 23 is full) is arranged downstream of the payout ball flow path. The overflow sensor 221b is, for example, a pressure sensor that detects the pressure from the game ball, and is attached to the rear surface side of the ball flow path unit base 221, as shown in FIG. 29(a), for example.
The arrows in FIG. 29(a) indicate the downward flow direction of the game balls paid out from the payout unit (
That is, it is an arrow that indicates the direction in which the game ball is guided by the payout ball flow path.

All the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been shot into the game area 32 and finished playing are discharged from the ball receiving port 221d (see FIG. 28) provided on the front side of the ball passage unit base 221 to the ball passage unit. 220 , flows down an out-sphere channel provided between the spherical channel unit base 221 and the front cover member 222 , and is discharged out of the spherical channel unit 220 . The discharged game balls are discharged from the game machine 10 to the island facility side. For example, as shown in FIG. 29(b), on the rear surface of the front lid member 222, out-spherical flow path forming ribs 222 that form the out-spherical flow path are provided.
a is projected.
An out-ball detection switch 32a is arranged in the middle of the out-ball flow path, and the game balls passing through the out-ball flow path are detected one by one by the out-ball detection switch 32a. . Note that the arrows in FIG. 29(b) indicate the flowing direction of all game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been shot into the game area 32 and have finished playing (that is, the direction in which the game balls are guided by the out ball flow path). is an arrow indicating

The out ball detection switch 32a is not a sensor that detects all game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been shot into the game area 32 and finished playing, but detects out balls (the out port 30a provided in the game area 32 ( (See FIG. 30)) may be a sensor that detects a game ball that has flowed into. That is, the ball receiving opening 221d of the ball passage unit 220 may be configured so that only the out balls flow into the ball receiving port 221d without the safe balls (game balls that have won the winning area).

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 30, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-like game board main body 80 that serves as an attachment base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front surface of the game board main body 80 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls (guide rails) 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30 . A game area 32 is provided. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by shooting a game ball from a batted ball shooting device 240 into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 . In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, and the like are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32 . Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 is arranged as a performance display device (variation display device) for variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode-ray tube). In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), it is possible to display still images and moving images as effect images. Information related to the game such as a background image that enhances the performance effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. The display screen also displays images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.).

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball that has passed through the warp flow path rolls. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting prize winning port 36, the game ball rolling on the stage portion 620 easily enters the starting prize winning port 36.例文帳に追加
A board effect device 44 is provided on the upper part of the center case 40 to effect a game effect by operating it. This board effect device 44 changes the display device 41 from the state shown in FIG.
It is operable toward the center of the

A normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . Inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 31) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided.
When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed.

Two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40 , and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40 . Winning of game balls into these general winning openings 35 is detected by a winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 31) provided in the general winning opening 35. FIG.

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area) that provides conditions for starting the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game). A game ball that has entered the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 31).

In the right part of the center case 40, there is provided a normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning area) that provides a starting condition for the special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game). A game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 31).
The normal variable prize winning device 37 has a movable member (not shown), and this movable member normally maintains a closed state (disadvantageous state for the player) in which game balls cannot enter. Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined result, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in an open state (game It is designed to be changed to a state that is advantageous to the person).

In addition, in this embodiment, the movable member of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is the normal solenoid 37
Although it is a so-called tongue type normal electric accessory that opens and closes by moving forward and backward (slides) by c, the movable member of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is not limited to this. Ordinary fluctuation winning device 3
The movable member 7 may be, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that is opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted forward by the general electric solenoid 37c, or a reverse "H" by the general electric solenoid 37c. It may be a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory that opens in the shape of ".
Further, the normal variable prize winning device 37 may allow game balls to win prizes even when the movable member is in the closed state, and may be in a state in which the game balls are less likely to win in the closed state than in the open state.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, between the normal figure start gate 34 and the normal variation winning device 37, there is a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept game balls depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A convertible first special variable winning device (upper grand winning opening) 38 is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 has an opening/closing member (not shown) that advances and retreats (slides) in the front-rear direction.
By doing so, the upper big winning hole is converted into a state in which game balls can flow in. First special variable winning device 3
8, depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the upper large winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state, and by facilitating the inflow of game balls into the upper large winning opening, the player is given a predetermined A game value (prize ball) is provided. A game ball winning the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 31).

A specific area into which game balls can flow is provided inside the upper big winning opening (winning area), and a lever solenoid 38f is provided so as to change the inflow probability of game balls into the specific area.
(See FIG. 31) is provided with a lever member actuated by. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 31) capable of detecting the inflow of game balls is provided in the specific area. (In this embodiment, the high probability state occurs after the special game state ends).
A game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 .

Further, inside the upper grand prize winning port, a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 31) is provided for detecting game balls discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 without flowing into the specific area. ing. The number of game balls detected by the big winning hole switch 38a provided inside the upper big winning hole (the number of game balls flowing into the upper big winning hole), the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 3
By matching the number of game balls detected in 8e (the number of game balls discharged from the upper special prize opening), it can be confirmed that all the game balls in the upper special prize opening have been discharged, and basically this confirmation is performed. The opening of a new upper grand prize opening is not performed until is completed.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, on the right side of the start winning opening 36, there is a second special variable winning that can be converted between a state where the game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept the game ball depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A device (lower grand prize opening) 39 is provided. Second special variable winning device 3
At 9, an opening/closing member (not shown) advances and retreats (slides) in the front-rear direction, thereby converting the lower big winning hole into a state in which game balls can flow in. The second special variable prize winning device 39 converts the closed state of the lower special prize winning opening to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, thereby facilitating the inflow of game balls into the lower special prize winning opening. , to provide the player with a predetermined game value (prize ball). A game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 39 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 31).

In the game area 32 below the start winning opening 36, an out opening 30a is provided for collecting game balls that have not won a prize such as a winning opening. In addition, the game board main body 80 outside the game area 32
In the lower right corner of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special figure 2 fluctuation display game)
And a collective display device 50 is provided for executing the normal pattern variation display game.

The collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 composed of a 7-segment display (LED lamp) etc.
Consists of a special figure 1 indicator (first special figure variation display unit) 51 for the variation display game and a special figure 2 indicator (second special figure variation display unit) 52 for the special figure 2 variation display game, and an LED lamp The first memory display unit 53 for notifying the number of starting memories of the special figure 1 variable display game and the second memory display unit 54 for notifying the number of starting memories of the special figure 2 variation display game composed of LED lamps Prepare.

In addition, the collective display device 50 has a round display section 55 that displays the number of rounds at the time of the big win (the number of opening and closing times of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39), and the number of rounds that is advantageous to the player between left-handed (normal) and right-handed. A first game state display unit 56 for informing how to beat (a way to beat corresponding to the game state), and a probability display unit 57 for notifying the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure variation display game are provided. there is The collective display device 50 includes a probability state display unit for displaying that the probability state of the big win is high probability state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, and a display that lights up when the big win occurs to notify the occurrence of the big win. A unit (display) or the like may be provided.
In addition, a normal pattern display unit 58 for displaying the normal pattern fluctuation display game, a memory display unit 59 for notifying the number of starting memories of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and a time saving state that lights up when the time saving state occurs and notifies the time saving state occurrence A notification unit 60 and the like are provided.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 is, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is driven to blink to indicate that it is changing. The flashing period is set to 100 ms, for example. In the case of this embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 indicator 51, in addition to the central segment, the 8th segment provided on the lower right side of the 7 segments is also blinked. To display that it is fluctuating, special figure 1
and special figure 2 are configured to be distinguishable. Then, when the result of the game is "losing", for example, the center segment (if it is a special figure 1, the 8th segment on the lower right side) is lit as a result of losing, and the result of the game is In the case of a "hit", the game result is displayed by turning on the result mode (for example, numbers and symbols) other than the result mode of the win (special result mode).

The first memory display unit 53 stores the number of undigested balls (the number of starting memories = the number of reservations) among the number of winning balls to the starting winning opening 36, which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display device 51. ,lighting blinking)
Display by
The second storage display unit 54 is the normal fluctuation winning device 37 that is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display device 52
The number of undigested balls out of the number of winning balls (number of starting memories = number of reservations) is turned off and lit (
flashing).
The round display unit 55 is composed of LED lamps and the like, and when the special game state is not in progress, all the LEDs are turned off, and in the special game state, the LEDs are turned on corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result. turn it on. The round display section 55 may be configured by a 7-segment type display.

The first game state display unit 56 is composed of LED lamps and the like. For example, when the game state is such that left-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting (during normal hitting), all LEDs are turned off and left-handed When the game state is such that right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting (at the time of right-handed hitting), all the LEDs are turned on.
The probability display unit 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like.
In the case of the normal probability state), all the LEDs are turned off, and in the case of the big win probability state being the high probability state (variable probability state), all the LEDs are turned on.

FIG. 31 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for overall control of the game. an input unit 120 having an input port; an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver; and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120 and the output unit .

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, and an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating an operation clock for the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock for the random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as V, is supplied and enabled.

The power supply device 400 is an AC-DC power supply that generates a DC voltage of 32V from an AC power supply of 24V.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a converter and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V from a voltage of DC32V, and a game microcomputer 1
A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 11 in the event of a power failure;
It has a power failure monitoring circuit, and includes a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that inform the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are installed on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the , it is possible to remove it from the object of replacement and to reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data is supplied to the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is turned off. That is, the game control device 100 is capable of storing and holding information related to the game even if a power failure occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and after the power failure is restored, the game can be restarted based on the stored information. It constitutes a game information storage holding means.
The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, based on which the information stored in the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 has a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B and an RA that can be read and written at any time
M (random access memory) 111C.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores immutable information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area for the CPU 111A during game control and a storage area for various signals and random values. used as ROM 111B or RAM 11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. A game state (special game state) in which the game state is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached.
In the gaming machine 10, at a stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed
A display state in which a display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for becoming a special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, if the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same A state that has become identification information,
However, excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this ready-to-win state.

This ready-to-reach state includes a plurality of ready-to-reach effects, and as ready-to-reach effects with different possibilities of deriving special result modes (different expected values), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 Reach) and Premier Reach are set. The expected value is no reach < normal reach < special 1 reach < special 2 reach < special 3 reach <
It becomes higher in order of premier reach. Further, this ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is lost). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state occurs is a state with a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the case in which the ready-to-win state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices, and output them to the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a hit in the special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining the jackpot pattern, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (
Random number generation for generating a variation pattern random number for determining the variable display game execution time etc. in various reach and variable display without reach, hit random numbers for determining the hit of the normal figure variation display game circuit, and a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock for giving update timing to the random number generation circuit. ing.

In addition, the CPU 111A uses the ROM 111B in processing related to the special figure variation display game.
Any one variation pattern table is acquired from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the . Specifically, the CPU 111A, the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game (big hit, small hit or lose), the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state (low probability state or high probability state), Any one variation pattern table is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the number of starting memories and the like. Here, the CPU 111A
constitutes variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing a special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby releasing the prize balls. Perform control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning apparatus 37, Winning mouth switch 35a in general winning mouth 35, big winning mouth switch 38a in first special variable winning device 38, big winning mouth switch 39a in second special variable winning device 39, gate switch in normal starting gate 34 34a, a specific area switch 38d and a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e disposed in the first special variable winning device 38, all game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been shot into the game area 32 and have finished playing An interface chip that is connected to an out-ball detection switch 32a to detect, receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11 V and a low level of 7 V supplied from these switches, and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0 V to 5 V. (Proximity I/F) 121 is provided. The proximity I/F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch may be illegally shorted, the sensor or switch may be disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire may be cut and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as an abnormal condition, and to output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 , the third input port 124 or the fourth input port 126 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switches 38a and 39a, and the gate switch 3
4 a is input to the second input port 123 . Also, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the specific area switch 38d, the remaining ball discharge switch 38e, and the out ball detection switch 3
The detection signal of 2 a is input to the fourth input port 126 . Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 .

Further, the third input port 124 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the game machine 10, the detection signal of the vibration sensor 65 for detecting the vibration of the game machine 10,
A detection signal from a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and a detection signal from a main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are also input. It has become so.

Further, the third input port 124 receives a signal from a setting key switch 152 that detects the operation of the setting key operating section. The setting key operation section has a keyhole into which the setting key is inserted.
It is configured such that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it has been turned to the second position. In some cases, it is turned off.

The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit are operation units for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which the probability values for special results in the special figure fluctuation display game are assigned, and these operation units are operated. By doing so, it is possible to select a probability setting value assigned a probability value that becomes a special result in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is used in the game there is Here, six "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared as probability setting values.

When selecting the probability setting value, press R while turning the setting key of the setting key operation section to the second position.
By turning on the power of the gaming machine while operating (depressing) the AM initialization switch 112, the probability setting value change mode is entered, in which the probability setting value can be changed, and the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated ( ), the probability setting value can be changed. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and character ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays information on the probability setting value while an operation related to the probability setting value is being performed (during the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode). , the calculated base value and character ratio are displayed.

Also, the state where the setting key of the setting key operation section is turned to the second position (RAM initialization switch 11
2 is not operated), the currently selected probability set value is displayed on the performance display device 153, but the probability set value confirmation mode in which the probability set value cannot be changed is entered. Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operating portion cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment display, and displays the set probability values in numbers 1-6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode may be used as long as the probability setting value can be recognized. Other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may also be used.
The set probability value may be indicated by the lighting mode, emission color, or the like of one or a plurality of LEDs.

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out-ball detection switch 32a)
, is also supplied to a test-firing test apparatus (not shown) through the relay board 70 . Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37
The detection signal a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123 .

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the second input port 123 is processed by the enable signal CE when the gaming microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the second input port 123.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changed to valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device 200 is ready to accept commands), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (filled)), touch switch signal (input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the input signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 .

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from
A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as Also, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . The reset signal RESET is applied to each port 122, 123,
124 and 126 are not supplied. The data set in each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a trial firing test device of a certification organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, etc. via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor 61, the board radio wave sensor 62, and the vibration sensor 65, which cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as they are, are once captured by the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus as an error signal indicating that the machine is in a state in which the game cannot be controlled. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. there is A chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to a port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

The output section 130 is also provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140 . The second output port 134 is connected to the first large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b for opening the first special variable winning apparatus 38, and the second large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) for opening the second special variable winning apparatus 39. Winning opening solenoid 2) 39b, first special variable winning device 38
While outputting the operation data of the lever solenoid 38f that operates the internal lever member and the general electric solenoid 37c that opens the normal variable winning device 37, the display data of the performance display device 153 that displays the currently selected probability setting value This is a port for output.
The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . ON/ON of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting OFF data.

Also, the output unit 130 outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 7 .
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to 1. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game arcade, and information about the game machine 10 is transmitted. It can be supplied to an external device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, the output unit 130 receives operation data signals of the big winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, the lever solenoid 38f, and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. A driver (drive circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and outputs from the fourth output port 136 The third driver 138 c for outputting the ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 50 , and the external information signal to be supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137 to the external information terminal board 71 . A fourth driver 138d for outputting and a fifth driver 138e for receiving a display data signal of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134 and generating and outputting a drive signal are provided. Data is transmitted through serial communication from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. In order to drive the performance display device 153 operating at 5V, the fifth driver 138e has D as a power supply voltage.
C5V is supplied from power supply 400 .
Also, the second driver 138b for driving the segment lines of the collective display device 50 has DC1
2V is supplied. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line. A power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit.
The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V.
The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each game machine to the external inspection device 500 . photocoupler 13
9 is configured to allow two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, 124, and 126 are not provided. do not have.

Although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36,
The starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switches 38a and 39a, and the gate switch 34a in the normal fluctuation prize device 37 are provided with coils for magnetic detection, and when metal approaches the coils, the magnetic field changes. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball using a phenomenon is used. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are microswitches having mechanical contacts. can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 32 .
The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sounds for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.
It has

The main control microcomputer 311 stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321 consisting of a ROM (programmable read-only memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe that can hold memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power failure.
A RAM 323 is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that forms a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year/month/day, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 . A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the effect, and
It instructs the contents of the output video to the DP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, lights up the decoration lamp, controls the driving of the motor and solenoid, manages the performance time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a working area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. Sending and receiving data in parallel allows commands and data to be sent in a shorter time than in serial mode.

From VDP 312 to main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of display device 41 with lighting of decoration lamps provided on glass frame 15 and game board 30 is transmitted.
C. Synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. Note that VDP312
to the main control microcomputer 311. Interrupt signals INT0 to n to inform the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM, and a wait to inform that it is waiting for reception of commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . Also, an interrupt signal INT is sent from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311 .
is entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure pending number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are transmitted to the production control command signal (production command ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
operates at DC5V, and since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40), the board production device 44 (for example, the display device 41
A board production movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling a movable accessory that enhances the production effect in cooperation with the production display in the game. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . Note that the glass frame 15 may be provided with a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and may be provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 includes a production button switch 25a built in the production button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a cross key 29 provided on the glass frame 15, and an initial position of the motor in the board production device 44. Production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting etc.
The function of detecting the on / off state of and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, detecting the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300 and sending the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 A switch input circuit 336 is provided that has an input function.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is the effect control device 300 having the configuration as described above.
32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs, 32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, and 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs. DC5, which is the power supply voltage of the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC 15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. Furthermore, 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311
3.3V DC based on 5V DC when using a low voltage LSI such as
The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2V. Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. Also, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314
, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a cooling FA for cooling various parts of the game machine 10
N45 is connected, and cooling FAN45 drives in the state where the power supply of production control device 300 was turned on.

FIG. 33 shows the probability of big hits, the probability of falling, the probability of small wins, and the distribution probability of types of big wins in the case of winning a big win. In addition, the big hit is a special result (first special result) with the operation of the condition device
, and the small win is a special result (second special result) that does not involve the operation of the conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 is set (the character product continuous operating device is operated). The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of, for example, winning a small prize lottery. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term with a meaning.

The value of the jackpot probability (probability value), which is the probability of hitting the jackpot (first special result), is the special figure 1 and the special figure 2
, and the probability values in the low-probability state and the probability values in the high-probability state are respectively the probability values shown in FIG. 33(a).
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33(a), the same probability value is assigned to all of "setting 1" to "setting 6" as the probability value in the high probability state. May be assigned a value. That is, the probability value in the high-probability state may be switchable in multiple stages.
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33(a), the same probability value is assigned to "setting 1" and "setting 2" as the probability value in the low probability state, but different probability values are assigned. May be assigned. The same applies to “setting 3” and “setting 4”, “setting 5” and “setting 6”. That is, the number of steps is not limited as long as the probability value in the low probability state can be switched in multiple steps. Also, the same probability value may be assigned to all of "setting 1" to "setting 6" as the probability value in the low probability state. That is, the probability value in the low-probability state may not be switchable in multiple steps.

In addition, the distribution of effects may be made different between "setting 1" and "setting 2" having the same probability value in the assigned low-probability state. The same applies to “setting 3” and “setting 4”, “setting 5” and “setting 6”.
Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33(a), six probability setting values ("setting 1 ” to “Setting 6”)
are assigned, for example, three probability setting values (for example, “setting 1
” to “Setting 3”) and the remaining 3 probability setting values (for example, “Setting 4” to “Setting 6”)
may be left unused.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, in the special game state (first special game state) based on the big hit, the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variable operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 and is detected by the specific area switch 38d. By being (V passage), it becomes a high probability state after the end of the special game state, and becomes a low probability state when winning a drop lottery performed every time the special figure variation display game is executed. The probability of winning the falling lottery is as shown in FIG. 33(b).
In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result mode of any special figure variation display game of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game Both are high probability states.

A small hit probability, which is a probability of a small win (second special result), is a probability as shown in FIG. 33(c). This small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. Also, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the game state or the big hit probability. In the lottery for the big win and the small win, the big win and the small win are not won in duplicate. In addition, in this embodiment, the small hit is provided only in the special figure 2 and not in the special figure 1, that is, the small hit probability of the special figure 1 is 0, but it is not limited to this. may be provided in both special figure 1 and special figure 2. Also, if a small hit is provided for both special 1 and special 2, the small hit probability may be the same for special 1 and special 2, or special 2 is more likely than special 1. may be higher, and the special figure 1 may be higher than the special figure 2.

In addition, FIG. 33(d) shows the types of jackpots that can be selected in the special figures 1 and 2, and the distribution probabilities of each jackpot type.
The types of jackpots (first special result) in the special figure 1 variable display game include 10R probability variable jackpot and 4
There are three types of R probability variable jackpot and 10R normal jackpot. Similarly, there are three types of jackpots (first special result) in the special figure 2 variable display game: 10R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, and 10R normal jackpot. These jackpot types are selected based on jackpot symbol random numbers. The number of each jackpot type indicates the actual number of rounds, and the probability variation indicates that there is a high possibility that the game ball will flow into the specific area (variability operation area) and that it is likely to become a high probability state (variability state) after the special game state ends. , It indicates that the possibility of game balls flowing into the specific area (probability variable operating area) is low and it is difficult to become a high probability state (probability variable state) after the special game state ends.
Here, the actual number of rounds is the number of rounds in which opening control is performed such that winning balls are actually generated by opening the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 . The number of each jackpot type is the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot (the actual number of rounds + the number of rounds in which the opening time of the special variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 is short and the opening control is performed so that the winning ball does not actually occur). can be

Also, a first special result may be provided in which the possibility of game balls flowing into the specific area is lower than that of the variable probability big win, but the possibility of game balls flowing into the specific area is higher than that of the normal big win.
In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the high probability state is reached depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the specific area (variable probability operating area). If game balls do not flow into the area, the high probability state does not occur, and even if the jackpot type is normal, the high probability state occurs if the game balls flow into the specific area.

FIGS. 34(a) to (c) show opening modes in each round for each jackpot type.
Details of the open mode are shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 34(a), in the 10R variable probability big hit, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in the first round, and a long opening with V is performed to open a specific area (variable probability operation area). Long opening with V is an opening mode with a high possibility that game balls flow into a specific area (probability variable operating area). After the second round, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened.
As shown in FIG. 34(b), in the 4R variable probability big hit, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in the first round, and a long opening with V is performed to open the specific area (variable probability operation area).
From the 2nd to 4th rounds, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened, and the long opening without V is performed, and the 1st special variable winning device 38 is opened after the 5th round V-less short-circuit opening is performed in which the specific area is not opened. The non-V short opening is an opening mode in which the possibility of game balls flowing into the big winning opening is lower than the non-V long opening. That is, long opening without V is an opening mode in which winning balls are actually generated, and short opening without V is an opening mode in which the opening time is short and no winning balls are actually generated.

As shown in FIG. 34(c), in the 10R normal jackpot, in the first round, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened and the specific area (probability variable operation area) is opened. Short opening with V is an opening mode in which the possibility of game balls flowing into a specific area (probability variable operating area) is lower than long opening with V. Then, from the second round onwards, a V-less long opening for opening the first special variable winning device 38 is performed.
It is the V
Yes long open and V Yes short open only. That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the specific round, which is the round in which game balls may flow into the specific area, is the first round. Note that the specific round is not limited to the first round and can be changed as appropriate. again,
The specific round may be multiple times, such as the 1st round and the 5th round.

As shown in FIG. 35(a), in the long opening without V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened (t11) with the start of the round, and a predetermined number (for example, 9 ) is satisfied, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends (t12). After that, the processing time for the remaining balls in the upper grand prize opening is started (t12), and when the processing time for the remaining balls in the upper prize opening ends, the interval time starts (t13), and when the interval time ends, the next round starts (t14). ). note that,
If it is the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

As shown in FIG. 35(b), in long opening with V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t31). Furthermore, with the start of the round, lever solenoid 3
8f is turned on, and the specific area switch 38d is enabled. When the lever solenoid 38f is OFF, the lever member covers the specific area and game balls cannot flow in. When the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member retreats from the specific area and game balls can flow in. becomes. Further, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is effective is a state in which detection of game balls by the specific area switch 38d is treated as effective. On the other hand, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which even if a game ball is detected by the specific area switch 38d, it is treated as invalid.

The lever solenoid 38f is turned off after 64 milliseconds have passed since the start of the round (t32). After 100 milliseconds have elapsed since the lever solenoid 38f was turned off, the specific area switch 38d is disabled (t33). That is, there is a possibility that the winning game ball will flow into the specific area immediately after the first special variable winning device 38 is opened.

After 200 milliseconds from the start of the round, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t
34). After 2700 milliseconds have elapsed, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened again (
t35), when the openable time of 25000 ms elapses or when a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends. (t39). After that, the processing time for remaining balls in the upper grand prize opening is started (t39), and when the processing time for remaining balls in the upper prize opening ends, the interval time starts (t41), and when the interval time ends, the next round starts (t42). . In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

Also, after the second opening (t35) of the first special variable winning device 38, the lever solenoid 3
8f is also turned ON for a predetermined time (t36-t37, t38-t39). Also, the specific area switch 38d is enabled (t36). Since the second opening of the first special variable winning device 38 is a sufficiently long opening and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f continues for a long time, game balls almost certainly flow into the specific area. Become. Therefore, if the type of jackpot is variable, it will almost certainly be in a high-probability state.

In addition, the lever solenoid 38f can be kept ON for a predetermined period of time even after the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43). It is also possible to flow into the specific area for the game ball that has been played. In addition, the first special variable prize winning device 38
is closed, and when all the game balls that have won the first special variable prize winning device 38 are discharged within the remaining ball processing time of the upper grand prize winning opening, the lever solenoid 38f is activated at the end of the remaining ball processing time (t41). is turned off to end the operation, and the specific area switch 38d is disabled.

In addition, when the openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls win, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are processed for the remaining ball processing time of the upper large winning opening. If the lever solenoid 38f is not completely discharged within the above period and the lever solenoid 38f is completely discharged by the end of the period (t43) in which the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever solenoid 38f is turned OFF when the discharge is completed. is terminated, the specific area switch 38d is disabled.
In addition, when the openable time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls win, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are processed for the remaining ball processing time of the upper large winning opening. If not completely discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned ON (t43), the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned ON ends (t43). As a result, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation ends. In this case, after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t43) and 100 milliseconds elapses, the specific area switch 38d is disabled (t44).

As shown in FIG. 35(c), in short opening with V, the same opening as the first opening of the first special variable winning device 38 in long opening with V is performed (t51 to t54), and the opening is completed. (t54). Since the first special variable winning device 38 is opened for a very short time and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f is also for a short time, the possibility of game balls flowing into the specific area is low. Therefore, when the jackpot type is normal, it is rare to be in a high probability state.

It should be noted that the operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the switching between valid and invalid of the specific area switch 38d are performed in the same manner as in the case of long opening with V as long as the game ball remains in the first special variable winning device 38 ( t55-t63). Therefore, if game balls remain in the first special variable winning device 38 even after the processing time for the remaining balls in the upper grand prize opening has passed, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off when the discharge of the remaining balls is completed. , and the operation ends, and the specific area switch 38d is disabled. Also, if all the game balls are not ejected by the end (t62) of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state, the lever solenoid 3
At the end of the period in which 8f is ON (t62), the lever solenoid 38f is turned OFF and the operation ends, and after the lever solenoid 38f is turned OFF (t62).
, 100 milliseconds later, the specific area switch 38d becomes invalid (t63).

Also, the first opening (t31 to t34) of the first special variable winning device 38 in long opening with V shown in FIG. 35 (b), and the first opening in short opening with V shown in FIG.
The opening of the special variable winning device 38 (t51 to t54) is set to an open time that allows the first special variable winning device 38 to win at least one game ball.

As shown in FIG. 35(d), in short opening without V, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t71), and a predetermined number (
For example, 9 game balls win a prize, the first special variable winning device 3
8 is closed to end the round (t72). However, since the openable time is short, it is rare that the predetermined number of wins, which is the closing condition, occurs, and in most cases the game is closed as the openable time elapses. After that, the processing time for the remaining balls in the upper grand prize opening is started (t72), and when the processing time for the remaining balls in the upper prize opening ends, the interval time starts (t73), and when the interval time ends, the next round starts (t74). ). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

In addition, FIG. 34(d) shows an opening mode in the second special game state (special game state based on a small hit). In the second special game state, first, the small winning fanfare time is started, and when the small winning fanfare time ends, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened and 16
The second special variable prize winning device 39 is closed when any of the conditions of either the lapse of the openable time of 00 msec or the winning of a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls is established. After that, the small winning remaining ball processing time is started, and when the small winning remaining ball processing time ends, the small winning ending time starts, and when the small winning ending time ends, the second special game state ends. It should be noted that there may be a plurality of types of opening/closing modes (opening time and number of times of opening) in the second special game state. .

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 36 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state in this embodiment.
It is a figure which illustrates.
In the game state, the normal game state ST1, the first specific game state ST2, the second specific game state ST
There are 3. In addition, as the special game state, there is a first special game state based on the first special result (big hit) and a second special game state based on the second special result (small hit), but they are omitted here. In each game state, the special figure probability that the first special result to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, the production mode that determines the production mode of the game controlled by the production control device 300, the main in the game state A main starting area which is a starting area to be aimed at, a main variation special figure which is the type of special figure variation display game to be mainly executed, and a shooting direction of the game ball are defined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim to win a prize in the start winning port 36 by hitting left, and to aim for winning in the normal variable prize winning device 37 by hitting right. In other words, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will. Also, in each game state, it is designed on the assumption that either one of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game will be played mainly, and the player will play the game according to this design. It is structured so that it is more advantageous for the player to progress the game mainly with one of the special figure fluctuation display games which is determined to be the main one in terms of design so as to proceed. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be the main in each gaming state may be referred to as main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as irregular variation.

The normal game state ST1 is a state in which the special figure probability is low probability, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. It is in a state where there is no time to shorten the variation time of the figure variation display game. Also, the production mode that defines the production mode is the normal mode. The main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the shooting direction is left-handed in order to aim at this starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variation display game is the irregular variation. In this normal game state ST1, a very long variation time is set for the special figure 2 variation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game becomes inefficient in terms of time, and the player is prevented from selecting the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game aiming at obtaining a small hit in the normal game state ST1. .

In the second specific game state ST3, the special figure probability is basically a low probability state. However, when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variable operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 in the special game state based on the normal jackpot (when there is V passage), it becomes a high probability state. In addition, there is a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is general electricity support, there is also a time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the general figure fluctuation display game. A performance mode that defines a performance mode is a chance mode. In addition, the main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the normal variation winning device 37, and the shooting direction is right-handed in order to aim at this normal variation winning device 37.
That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variation display game is the irregular variation.

The first specific game state ST2 is a state in which the special figure probability is high probability, and there is no general electric support for improving the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure variable display game. It is a state where there is a time saving that shortens the fluctuation time of. A performance mode that defines a performance mode is a small hit RUSH. In addition, the main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the normal variation winning device 37, and the shooting direction is right-handed in order to aim at this normal variation winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variation display game is the irregular variation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the probability of a winning result in the normal pattern variation display game in the state with the general electric support (normal pattern probability) is the same probability as the state without the general electric support (normal probability). Not limited to, in a state where there is a general electric support, the general pattern probability can be set to a high probability (normal pattern high probability state) higher than the normal probability (normal pattern low probability state).
Further, in the present embodiment, the state without general electric support means that the normal variable prize winning device 37 is opened, but the opening time per unit time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is shorter than the state with general electric support. be.

In the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a shorter time state than in the case of the normal game state ST1, and the normal variable winning device 37 is hit to the right. It is advantageous for the player to aim at and play the special figure 2 variable display game. The special figure 2 fluctuation display game has a higher probability of a small hit than the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (in the case of this embodiment, the special figure 1 small hit probability is 0), and the small hit is won rather than the big hit. Since the probability of doing so is high, small hits occur with high frequency in the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3.
When the result of the special figure variation display game is a small win in the second specific game state ST3, the state with the general electric support continues even in the special game state based on the small win, and in the first specific game state ST2. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a small win, the state without general electric support continues even in the special game state based on the small win. Also, in a special game state based on a small hit, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, but the first special variable winning device 38 is not opened (see FIG. 34(d)).

Therefore, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small win in the second specific game state ST3, most of the game balls hit to the right are normal fluctuation winning in the special game state based on the small win. The second prize winning device 37 and arranged below the normal variable winning device 37
It does not flow down to the special variable winning device 39. Therefore, in the second specific game state ST3, small hits occur with high frequency, but it is difficult to increase the number of balls held by the player due to the small hits.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small win in the first specific game state ST2, most of the game balls hit to the right are normal fluctuation winning in the special game state based on the small win. It flows down to the second special variable winning device 39 arranged below the normal variable winning device 37 without winning the device 37 . Therefore, in the first specific game state ST2, it is easy to increase the number of game balls of the player by a small hit. That is, in the first specific game state ST2, small hits occur with high frequency and the player's possession of balls increases, so the effect mode is the small hit RUSH.
This mode is called

Among these three game states, the normal game state ST1 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The second specific game state ST3 is a state more advantageous for the player than the normal game state ST1 because of the general electric support. The first specific game state ST2 is a high probability state, and further,
This state is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3 because the number of balls held by the player increases due to the frequent occurrence of small hits.

The transition of the game state is performed by ending the first special game state based on the derivation of the first special result, completing the specified number of games, and winning the falling lottery, which is the lottery for transition to the low probability state. . Basically, the probability variable jackpot is derived and becomes the first special game state, and in the first special game state, the game ball flows into the specific area (variability operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 and the specific area switch When it is detected at 38d (when there is V passage), the transition to the first specific game state ST2 is made after the end of the first special game state. On the other hand, when the variable probability big hit is derived and becomes the first special game state, and the game ball does not flow into the specific area (variable probability operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 in the first special game state (no V passage case), after the end of the first special game state, it shifts to the normal game state ST1. In addition, the normal jackpot is derived and becomes the first special game state, and if there is no V passage in the first special game state, the second specific game state ST3 (special figure low probability) after the end of the first special game state Second specific game state ST
3). On the other hand, the normal jackpot is derived and becomes the first special game state, and if there is V passage in the first special game state, the second specific game state ST3 (special figure high probability) after the end of the first special game state It shifts to the second specific game state ST3).
Further, when the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state in the second specific game state ST3, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. Also, the first
When the drop lottery is won in the specific game state ST2, the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variation display game. In addition, when not distinguishing the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game, it is simply referred to as the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. again,
When the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply called hits (special result). Moreover, when not distinguishing the 1st special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit, and the 2nd special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit, it is simply called a special game state.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game ball (
A game is played by hitting a pachinko ball). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and enters a normal figure start gate 34 and a general winning opening 35. , the start winning port 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, or flow into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and enter the game area 32 is discharged. Then, when the game ball wins the general winning hole 35, the start winning hole 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, the number corresponding to the type of the winning winning port are discharged to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15 from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 31).

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the shooting force and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left-handed hitting), so that the starting winning opening 36 and the left side of the starting winning opening 36 You can aim to win a prize to the disposed general winning port 35, and by shooting a game ball to the right side game area (so-called right hitting), the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the first special variable winning Players can aim to win prizes in the device 38, the second special variable prize winning device 39, and the general prize winning port 35 arranged on the right side of the second special variable prize winning device 39.

In the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a composed of a non-contact type switch or the like for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided.
When the game ball hit inside passes through the normal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal pattern start gate 34, the normal pattern start memory number is the upper limit number (for example, 4 ), add the normal figure start memory number (+1
) to store one normal drawing start memory in the ROM 111B. The number of memory of this normal figure start winning prize is displayed on the normal figure reservation indicator 56 of the collective display device 50. - 特許庁In addition, the normal pattern start memory stores a hit judgment random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal pattern variation display game extracted based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a. It is designed to be

Then, when there is a normal pattern start memory and the normal pattern variation display game can be started, that is, when the normal pattern variation display game is not being executed, the normal pattern variation display game wins and the normal variation winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If there is no winning state, the random value for winning determination stored in the first stored normal pattern start memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit/loss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. Then, processing for starting the normal pattern fluctuation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number matches the determination value, the normal pattern variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal pattern specific result) is derived.

In addition, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time in the normal pattern display unit 58 provided in the collective display device 50 as processing for executing the normal pattern fluctuation display game. After performing the normal pattern fluctuation display that is repeatedly displayed in the order given, the process of displaying the normal pattern fluctuation display game that stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed.
In addition, the normal figure display unit 58 is configured by the display device 41, and the normal identification information includes numbers, symbols,
It is also possible to use a character pattern or the like, variably display this for a predetermined period of time, and then stop display to display the result.

When the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a hit, the normal pattern display unit 58 stops displaying a lighting pattern that is a special result mode, and the general electrical solenoid 37c is operated to activate the movable member of the normal variation winning device 37. Control is performed to open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, the normal pattern display unit 58 is controlled to display a lighting pattern as a result of the loss.

Winning balls to the starting winning opening 36 and winning balls to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by a starting opening 1 switch 36a and a starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first starting memory forming the starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 is set to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4
), and stores a second start memory forming a start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning to the normal variable prize winning device 37 up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). Based on winnings to the starting prize winning port 36 and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37, a jackpot random number value, a jackpot pattern random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted as starting memory information, respectively. Numerical values are stored in the RAM 111B as first start memory and second start memory. And the number of memories of this starting memory is the first memory display unit 53 (special figure 1 reservation display) and the second memory display unit 54 (special figure 2 reservation display) for notifying the number of starting winnings of the collective display device 50 , and is also displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decorative special figure start memory display.

The game control device 100 performs the special figure 1 variable display game with the special figure 1 indicator 51 (first variation display device) based on the first start memory, and the special figure 2 indicator 52 ( A special figure 2 variable display game is performed on the second variable display device). The special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at the same time, but during the execution of one special figure variation display game, the other special figure variation display game becomes the first special result (big hit). If it is, the one special figure variation display game is terminated as a result other than the special result (loss result). Also, during the execution of one of the special figure fluctuation display games, if the other special figure fluctuation display game results in a second special result (small hit), the one of the special game states until the end of the special game state based on the small hit The special figure fluctuation display game is interrupted.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area). It constitutes first execution control means for performing control. In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100,
It constitutes a second execution control means for controlling the execution of the special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 (second start winning area).

In the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, after performing the variable display, the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 becomes a special result form (jackpot result form) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit, and becomes a first special game state (so-called big win state).
In addition, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 corresponds to the second special result special result mode (small hit result mode) As a result, it becomes a small hit, and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, special figure 1
The display device 51 constitutes first variable display means capable of displaying a first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning hole 36 . In addition, the special figure 2 display device 52 constitutes a second variation display means capable of displaying a second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on winning of game balls to the normal variation winning device 37 .

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 has a jackpot game state (first special game state)
After the end of, control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can be progressed in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (high probability of winning or having general electric support) It is possible. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 serves as a specific game state generating means.

In addition, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the display device 41
A decoration special figure variable display game is executed in which a plurality of types of decoration identification information (numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner. The decoration special figure variation display game on the display device 41 includes a decoration special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and a decoration special figure 2 variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game. Yes, and they are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed with the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 is a decoration variable display game ( It constitutes a decoration variable display means capable of displaying a decoration special figure variable display game). In addition, separate display devices may be used for the decoration special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure 2 variation display game, or only one decoration special figure variation display game may be displayed. Also, game machine 1
The special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without having the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 in 0.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is 0), but when it is in the normal game state A long variation with a very long variation time (about 10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the variation display game in FIG. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes inefficient in terms of time in the normal game state, so that the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game aiming at obtaining a small hit in the normal game state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player to play the special figure 1 variable display game by hitting the left hand and aiming at the start winning opening 36. - 特許庁
The long fluctuation time is about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.). Also, the time of long fluctuation may be changed according to the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Specifically, for example, if the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a loss or a small hit, a long variation of about 10 minutes is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game, If the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit, the special figure 2
A long variation with a variation time of about 5 minutes may be selected as the variation pattern of the variation display game.

The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the game control device 10
0 game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 will be described. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In this main processing, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, first, processing for prohibiting interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then, when an interrupt occurs, the start address of the area where the values of registers, etc. are saved is A stack pointer setting process (step X2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X
4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of RAM addresses is 0000h to 01FFh, with 00h or 01h being the higher order, and the top 00h being set in step X4. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step X5). When at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is outputting a firing stop signal, the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state, and the firing of game balls is prohibited.

Thereafter, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and processing for setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, by setting a predetermined initial value, the game control device 1 acting as main control means
Waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program of the subordinate control means (for example, payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) to start normally according to instructions from 00
is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and waits for the start of the sub-control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It constitutes waiting means for setting a waiting time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so that the control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X8), and if a power failure has occurred (step X8; Y), the game machine power wait for it to shut off.
Specifically, in step X8, for example, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and data bus and the number of times (for example, two times) to be checked is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. determine whether there is Then, if the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the set number of checks. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal has not continued for the number of checks, the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, if the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54, which will be described later. In this way, by judging that a power failure has occurred when a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and to appropriately handle problems that occur when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with problems that occur when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if no power failure has occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10).
If the timer value is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power failure has occurred (step X8). Also, if the timer value is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, if the waiting time has expired,
Access to a readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM and EEPROM is permitted (step X11), and off data is output to all output ports (set to no output state) (step X12).

Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, in this embodiment, used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step X13), and the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) to start a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) (step X14). Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and the CPU 1 based on the frequency-divided signal.
11A has a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a signal CTC that triggers random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.
Next, a RAM abnormality flag is set (step X15). Here, regardless of whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM, on the premise that there is an abnormality in the RAM, a RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (eg 5Ah) (step X16), and if normal (step X16; Y),
Power failure inspection area check data 2 where the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal (for example, A5h)
(step X17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), a checksum calculation process (step X18) is performed to calculate the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM. match the checksum (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y)
Since there is no abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is cleared (step X20), and the process proceeds to step X21.

Further, when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), when it is determined that the checksum does not match (step X19; N), step Based on the state read by X6, it is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (step X21). If at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22; Y), since there is an abnormality in the RAM, the main abnormality error notification command for notifying that the game control device 100 is abnormal is sent to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). Then, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), a command for main abnormality error notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag that is set here is the probability setting flag that was set before the power failure occurred. In other words, if the gaming machine is powered off and restarted while the probability set value is being changed,
Since the operation of the game control device 100 is stopped, the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e through the second output port 134 (step X25). As a result, in the performance display device 153,
A display as shown in FIG. 41(h) is performed. Thereafter, ON data of the security signal is output and OFF data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X26).
, return to step X25.

If both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27). Then, if the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X27
;N), a probability setting changing flag is set (step X29). This shifts to the probability setting value change mode. After that, a command for changing the probability setting is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X30), and the process proceeds to step X31. In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the command for changing the probability setting, the display of the display device 41, the LED emission of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, the speaker 1
The fact that the probability set value is being changed is notified by means of voice output from 9a and 19b.
On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), the process of clearing the probability set value (step X28) is performed. As a result, 0 is set in the probability setting value area in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes "setting 1". After that, step X29,
The process of X30 is performed, and the process proceeds to step X31.

Further, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the OFF state (step X21; N) and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (step X22; N and step X23 ;N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is on based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). If the setting key switch 152 is not on (step X35; N
), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

If it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not on (step X43; N)
In other words, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the off state, the process moves to step X41 to perform the processing for the normal recovery from the power failure.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step X43
In ;Y), the process proceeds to step X44 to perform the initialization process. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. make a means of

If the setting key switch 152 is on (step X35; Y), the probability setting checking flag is set (step X36). This shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode. After that, the production control board (production control device 300) for the command during probability setting confirmation
(step X37). In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the probability setting confirmation command, the display of the display device 41, the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46
By the light emission of, the operation of the board effect device 44, the sound output by the speakers 19a and 19b, etc.
It notifies that the probability setting value is being confirmed.

A value corresponding to 128 ms is saved in the security signal control timer area in order to guarantee output of the security signal for 50 ms or more (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change/confirmation process (step X122) of the timer interrupt process when the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode is selected. It is output in the process (step X120). Therefore, 12
If the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode ends in less than 8 milliseconds, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. That is, even if the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 milliseconds, the security signal is not output for 128 milliseconds after shifting to the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode. be. Note that the value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 milliseconds. However, at least 5
Since it is necessary to output the security signal during 0 ms, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 ms or more.

Then, the interrupt is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is off (step X33). At step X33, determination is not made based on the state read at step X6 (state at the time of power-on), but the state (current state) read in the input processing (step X103) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 39). decision based on If it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the OFF state, the probability set value is determined.
If the setting key switch 152 is not in the OFF state (step X33; N), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X34), and if no power failure has occurred (step X34;
N), the process returns to step X33, and when a power failure occurs (step X34; Y), the process proceeds to step X55. When it is determined in step X34 that a power failure has occurred while the probability setting change flag is set, in step X23 of the main processing (FIGS. 37 and 38) after recovery from the power failure, It is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, if the setting key switch 152 is in the OFF state (step X33; Y), a process of prohibiting interruption (step X38) is performed. Processing for enabling interrupts (step X32
) and before the interrupt prohibiting process (steps X38, X55), the timer interrupt process (FIG. 39) is performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms). In the timer interrupt processing, probability setting change/confirmation processing (step X122
) is performed. In other words, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability set value is completed (or until a power failure occurs).
Then, a command for ending notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X39). In the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the notification end command,
The notification being executed (notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or notification indicating that the probability setting value is being confirmed) is terminated.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, if the probability setting checking flag is set is the area to be initialized (for example, the blackout inspection area,
A power failure recovery process (step X41) is performed to save an initial value at the time of power failure recovery in a checksum area and an area related to error monitoring). The probability setting confirming flag is cleared at this step X41.
After that, the power failure recovery command corresponding to the special game processing number is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X42), and the process proceeds to step X47. In the case of this embodiment, in step X42, a plurality of commands such as model designation command, probability setting information command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, effect number information command, screen designation command Send command. As a command for specifying the screen, when the special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both in the normal processing described later, that is, when the special figure fluctuation display game is not being executed and the special game state is not in progress If it is waiting for a customer Send the command for the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command for the recovery screen. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a high-probability number-of-times information command or the like is also transmitted.

On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (step X44). At step X44, the RAM area for the probability setting value (work area (1-byte area for the probability setting value)) and the RAM area (work area and stack area) for performance display (display of base value and character ratio) are cleared. Instead, 0 clear the RAM area for game control (work area and stack area). Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared at this step X44. Note that in step X44,
The stack area and unused area may or may not be cleared.

Then, the initial values at the time of RAM initialization are saved in the area to be initialized (step X45).
. The area to be initialized here is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X46). In the case of this embodiment, in step X46, model designation command, probability setting information command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, effect number information command, RAM initialization command (customer waiting A demonstration screen is displayed, and a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands,
A support frequency information command, etc., which is information on the number of executions of the special figure variation display game with the performance frequency information command and the general electric support, is also transmitted.

Next, a process for starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set. The bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit permutation pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random number and improve the secrecy of the random number. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be able to arbitrarily set it.

After that, predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on
Extract the value of the corresponding various initial random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers to determine the winning pattern of the special pattern (big hit pattern random number, small winning pattern random number), random numbers to determine the hit of the general pattern (hit random number ), R
After saving in a predetermined area of WM (step X48), interrupts are permitted (step X4
9). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step X50) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random numbers, jackpot pattern random numbers, small hit pattern random numbers, hit random numbers, and falling lottery random numbers are generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. is configured as However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock that is faster than the operating clock of the CPU. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from the CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) that has the same period as the timer interrupt process, which is a unit. In addition, in the jackpot pattern random number, the small hit pattern random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number, each time the random number goes around, the initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value. ” is adopted. Each random number is +1 or -1
, or random update in which all the values within the range appear randomly without duplication until a cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, winning random number, and falling lottery random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.
In the present embodiment, since there is no random number (hit pattern random number) for determining the winning pattern of the general pattern, there is only one type of winning pattern of the general pattern, but the winning pattern of the general pattern is set by providing the winning pattern random number. may be selected from a plurality of types.

After the initial value random number update process of step X50, the process of prohibiting interrupts (step X51)
to perform performance display editing processing (step X52). Then, after performing the process of permitting the interrupt (step X53), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X54), and if the power failure has not occurred (step X54; N), the initial value random number update process (Step X5
0). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process, performance display editing process, and power failure monitoring are repeatedly performed. By enabling the interrupt (step X49) before the initial value random number update process (step X50), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt processing due to the waiting due to the initial value random number update processing.

Note that the initial value random number updating process in step X50 can be performed not only in the main process but also in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable interrupts and then update to cancel the interrupts.
If the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the present embodiment, but only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage of simplifying the main processing.

On the other hand, if a power failure has occurred (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily prohibiting interrupts (step X55) and a process of outputting OFF data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57
), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58).
Furthermore, after performing checksum calculation processing (step X59) for calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown of the RWM and processing for saving the calculated checksum (step X60), the RW
After executing the process of prohibiting access to M (step X61), it waits until the power supply of the game machine is cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. A decision can be made at the time of re-insertion.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game overall, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means ), the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined waiting time.
Also, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) , it is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization means (RAM initialization switch 112) that initializes data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit (
A game control device 100) is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.
Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started at predetermined intervals. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and FIG.
timer interrupt processing is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step X1
01). By switching to register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing register save processing to move the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in main processing) to RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, an input process (step X103) for reading inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104), and if the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104; Y) , probability setting change/confirmation processing (step X122)
to terminate the timer interrupt processing.
On the other hand, if both the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag are not set (step X104; N), the solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) are controlled based on the output data set in various processes. , lever solenoid 38f, general electric solenoid 37
Output processing (step X105) for performing drive control of actuators such as c) is performed. When a firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, signal processing and the like are not performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the state of launch permission viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (fire permission signal) indicating the state of firing permission viewed from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated within the device and output to the launch control device. In other words, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, payout command transmission processing (step X106) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, random number update processing 1 (step X107),
Random number update process 2 (step X108) is performed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switches 38a and 39a, the setting of the prize balls, the front frame and the glass Winning port switch/state monitoring processing (step X109) for monitoring errors such as frame opening and illegal winning to the normal variable winning device 37 and special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is performed.

Next, it is determined whether abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that the number of game balls discharged from the first special variable prize winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e) is It is to exceed the number of game balls flowing into the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the big winning opening switch 38a). Note that an abnormal discharge flag is set when abnormal discharge is occurring. Then, when abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process proceeds to step X116. That is, the game is prevented from progressing.

On the other hand, if abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), the start port 1 switch 3
6a and starting port switch monitoring processing (step X
111). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, the starting winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37
Various random numbers (such as jackpot random numbers) are extracted based on the winning of game balls. And special figure 1
Special figure 1 game processing (step X112) for performing processing related to the variation display game, special figure 2 game processing (step X113) for performing processing regarding the special figure 2 variation display game, general figure game processing for performing processing related to the normal figure variation display game (Step X114) is performed, and the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display various information related to the display of the special figure fluctuation display game and the game
to display the desired content segment LED editing process (step X115)
I do.

Next, magnet fraud monitoring processing (step X116) for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determining whether there is an abnormality, and processing for checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 and determining whether there is an abnormality. board radio fraud monitoring processing (step X117), vibration fraud monitoring processing (step X118) for checking the detection signal from the vibration sensor 65 and determining whether there is an abnormality, and determining whether abnormal discharge has occurred Abnormal discharge monitoring processing (step X119) is performed. Furthermore, external information editing processing (step X120) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, performance display monitor control processing (step X121) for controlling the performance display monitor 153 are performed, and the timer interrupt processing ends. do.

Here, in this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). It should be noted that depending on the CPU used, there are game machines that require an instruction to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
FIG. 40 shows probability setting change/confirmation processing (step X1) in the timer interrupt processing described above.
22) was shown. In this probability setting change/confirmation process, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is within the normal range (range of 0 to 5 in this embodiment) (step X13).
1).
When the value of the area for the probability setting value in RWM is within the normal range (step X131; Y)
is set the probability setting value display data corresponding to the value of the probability setting value area (current probability setting value) in the RWM (step X132), and the probability setting value display data is sent to the second output port. 134 to the fifth driver 138e (step X134). This will
In the performance display device 153, displays as shown in FIGS. 41(a) to 41(f) are performed.
On the other hand, if the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is not within the normal range (step X131
;N), set the light-off data as probability set value display data (step X133),
The probability set value display data is output to the fifth driver 138e through the second output port 134 (step X134). As a result, in the performance display device 153, FIG.
is displayed as shown in .

As shown in FIG. 41, the performance display device 153 is composed of four 7-segment displays (7-segment type displays) arranged side by side. During the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the rightmost 7-segment display among these four 7-segment displays indicates the current probability setting value, and the remaining 7-segment displays indicate "SET " is shown.
Specifically, when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is "0", the current probability setting value is "setting 1". If the segment indicator displays "1" and the value in the area for probability settings in the RWM is "1", the current probability settings are "1".
Since the setting is 2", "2" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 41(b). probability setting value is "Setting 3
”, “3” is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display as shown in FIG. 41(c), and RW
If the value of the probability setting value area in M is "3", the current probability setting value is "setting 4", so as shown in FIG. 4" is displayed, and if the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is "4", the current probability setting value is "setting 5", so as shown in FIG. When "5" is displayed on the 7-segment display and the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is "5", the current probability setting value is "setting 6", so FIG.
As shown in 1(f), "6" is displayed on the rightmost 7-segment display. Further, when the value of the area for the probability set value in the RWM is out of the normal range (abnormal value), the 7-segment display at the right end is turned off as shown in FIG. 41(g).
For example, when the value of the probability setting value area in the RWM is "0", the probability setting value display data is "1" in the first digit, "T" in the second digit, and "T" in the third digit. Probability setting value display data instructing to display "E" and "S" in the fourth digit is output to the fifth driver 138e.

Next, if the security signal control timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step X1
35). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set in step X31 of the main processing, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0".
Next, the on data of the security signal is output and the off data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X136). At step X136, security signal ON data is output regardless of whether the security signal control timer has timed out. Therefore, during the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode (while the probability setting change flag and the probability setting confirmation flag are set), the security signal continues to be output.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X137; N), that is, if the probability setting checking flag is set ends the probability setting change/confirmation process. On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is set (step X137; Y), the probability setting change/confirmation process being executed is the probability setting change/confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after power-on of the gaming machine 10. It is determined whether it is confirmation processing (step X138).

If it is the probability setting change/confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after power-on (step X138; Y), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not probability setting change/confirmation processing in the first timer interrupt processing after power-on (step X138; N)
determines whether there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139).
At step X139, the RAM initialization switch 1 is set in the previous input process (step X103).
When an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of 12 is detected, it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 . If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; N), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated.

On the other hand, if there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X139; Y),
That is, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is newly operated, the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 5 (step X140), and the probability setting change/confirmation process is executed. finish. The value updated in step X140 (updated probability setting value) is displayed on the performance display device 153 by the next probability setting change/confirmation process.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33(a), "setting 1" to "setting 6" are applied to three types of probability values (probability values in a low-probability state and probability values in a high-probability state). , but
For example, "setting 1" to "setting 3" may be assigned to three kinds of probability values (probability value in low probability state and probability value in high probability state). In this case, in step X140, the value of the RWM probability setting value area is updated by +1 within the range of 0-2.

By operating the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, it is possible to shift to the probability set value change mode, and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated during the probability set value change mode. You can change the probability setting value with .
Since the RAM initialization switch 112 can only be pressed, it is impossible to distinguish between a shift operation for shifting to the probability set value change mode and a change operation for changing the probability set value. Therefore, if the transition operation (the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the transition to the probability set value change mode) continues even during the probability set value change mode, that is, when the power is turned on, the RAM initialization switch If the button 112 is kept pressed, the probability set value is updated (changed) according to the operation even though the operation is a transition operation.

Specifically, in the input processing of the timer interrupt processing (step X103), the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the previous input processing is OFF, and the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the current input processing is OFF. When the state is the ON state, an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 is detected. In the input processing (step X103) in the first timer interrupt processing after power-on, the input processing immediately before power-off is the previous input processing, and the input processing immediately after power-on is the current input processing. The state of the RAM initialization switch 112 read in the process is highly likely to be the OFF state. That is, if the transition operation continues even during the probability set value change mode, the input signal (rising edge ) is likely to be detected.
Therefore, in this case, when the processing of steps X139 and X140 is performed in the probability setting change/confirmation processing in the first timer interrupt processing after power-on, it is determined that there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 based on the transition operation, Inconvenience may arise that the value of the area for the probability setting value in the RWM is updated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to avoid such an inconvenience, the process of step X138 is performed, and the processes of steps X139 and X140 are not performed in the probability setting change/confirmation process in the first timer interrupt process after power-on. It is assumed that As a result, regarding the update (change) of the probability set value, the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that has continued since the power was turned on (
That is, the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 that caused the transition to the probability setting value change mode is ignored, so unintended updating can be prevented.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a special result.
An operation unit (setting key operation unit), a second operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112), and storage means for storing one probability setting value out of a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values used for game lottery are assigned. (game control device 100 (RAM 111C)), and a mode for shifting to a probability set value change mode in which the probability set value can be changed in response to the operation of the first operation unit and the second operation unit when the power of the game machine is turned on. In response to the transition means (game control device 100) and the operation of the second operation unit in the probability set value change mode, the probability set value stored in the storage means (the value of the area for the probability set value in the RWM ) for changing the setting change means (game control device 100), and the operation (transition operation) of the second operation unit for shifting to the probability setting value change mode, and the second for changing the probability setting value The operation of the operation unit (change operation) is the same operation (pressing operation in the case of this embodiment), and the setting change means continues from the time the game machine is powered on even during the probability set value change mode. It is configured not to respond to the operation of the second operation unit that is being performed.
Therefore, if the operation (transition operation) of the second operation unit performed when the gaming machine is powered on continues even after the mode is shifted to the probability setting value change mode, the probability setting value is not changed during that time. It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
FIG. 42 shows the starting port switch monitoring process (step X1) in the timer interrupt process described above.
11) was shown. In this starting opening switch monitoring process, first, starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36)
A winning monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and hardware random number acquisition processing (step X49
2). Then, in the hardware random number acquisition process, it is determined whether or not there is starting opening winning information set when a jackpot random number is obtained based on winning to the starting winning opening 36 (step X49).
3).

Based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36, when the starting opening winning information is not set (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. Incidentally, in this case, the start-up no winning information is set.
On the other hand, when the information with the starting opening winning prize is set based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether it is during special low probability & no time saving (normal game state) (Step X494). And, if there is no special figure low probability & time saving (step X49
4;Y), the process proceeds to step X497. In addition, if it is not during special figure low probability & time saving (step X494; N), prepare a right hitting instruction notification command (step X495)
, effect command setting processing (step X496) is performed.

In the performance control device 300, based on the reception of the right-handed instruction notification command, the right-handed instruction notification is performed by display, sound, or the like to instruct the player to hit right. During a specific game state or a special game state, right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player, and a starting prize-winning port 36 that is designed not to win unless left-handed is in a specific game state or special game state. When a prize is detected in the inside, a right-handed instruction is notified.

Then, prepare a table for setting hold information by start port 1 (step X497).
, Performs special figure start opening switch common processing (step X498). Next, a winning monitoring table for starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) is prepared (step X499), hardware random number acquisition processing (step X500) is performed, and a jackpot random number is acquired based on the winning to the normal variable winning device 37. It is determined whether or not there is starting entrance winning information set in the case (step X501).

If the information with starting entrance winning is not set based on the winning to the normal variable winning device 37 (
At step X501; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated. Incidentally, in this case, the start-up no winning information is set.
On the other hand, when the starter winning information is set based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 (step X501; Y), the normal electric power (normal variable winning device 37) is in operation, that is, the normal It is determined whether or not the variable winning device 37 is in an open state in which game balls can be won (step X502), and when the general electric power is in operation (step X502; Y),
Move to step X504. On the other hand, if the general electricity is not in operation (step X502; N)
In step X503, it is determined whether or not an electricity fraud is occurring (step X503).

In determining whether or not fraud is occurring, it is determined that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball when it is closed, and can win a game ball only when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred.
If there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins.
Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

If the utility power fraud is occurring (step X503; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second starting memory is prevented from being generated any more. In addition, if it is not during the general electric fraud occurrence (step X503; N), prepare a table for setting the information of the hold by the start port 2 (step X504), special figure start port switch common processing (step X50
5) is performed to end the starting port switch monitoring process.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
FIG. 43 shows the special figure starting opening switch common processing (steps X498, X505) in the starting opening switch monitoring processing described above. Special figure starting mouth switch common processing, when there is an input of the starting mouth 1 switch 36a and the starting mouth 2 switch 37a, is a process that is performed in common for each input.

In this special figure starting opening switch common processing, first, out of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the game machine 1
Load the start signal output count, which is the number of outputs to the external control device of 0 (step X521), update the loaded value by +1 (step X522), and determine whether the output count overflows (step X523).
If the output count does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is set to R
Save in the starting port signal output count area of WM (step X524), and the special figure holding (starting memory) number corresponding to the starting door switch to be monitored, that is, the special figure holding (starting memory) number to be updated is the upper limit value ( Here, it is determined whether it is less than 4) (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of output times can be stored up to 255, but if the upper limit is stored, the value after the update is not saved because it loops and becomes 0 due to the +1 update.

And when the special figure reservation number to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step X525; N), the special figure start opening switch common processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the number of special figures pending to be updated is less than the upper limit (step X525; Y), the number of special figures pending to be updated (the number of special figures 1 pending or the number of special figures 2 pending) is updated by +1 (Step X526), save the target starting gate winning flag (step X527). Next, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number is calculated (step X528), and the jackpot random number prepared in the hardware random number acquisition process is saved in the RWM jackpot random number storage area. (Step X529).

After that, extract and prepare the jackpot pattern random number of the starting port switch to be monitored (step X5
30), save in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of RWM (step X531). Next, the fall lottery random number of the starting switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step X532), and the RWM
(step X533).
Next, it is determined whether or not the winning to the starting port 2 (normal variable winning device 37) (step X53
4) If there is no winning to the starting port 2 (step X534; N), the process proceeds to step X537. On the other hand, in the case of winning to the starting port 2 (step X534; Y), a small winning design random number is extracted and prepared (step X535), and saved in a small winning design random number storage area of RWM (step X536). .

Then, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (step X537), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step X53
8). Next, prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (step X539), production command setting process (step X540)
To end the special figure start opening switch common processing.
That is, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36, and the predetermined random number is used as a first start memory to store up to a predetermined upper limit number. Forms a starting memory means. In addition, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37, and converts the predetermined random number to the second
It constitutes a second start memory means capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number as a start memory.

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
FIG. 44 and FIG. 45 show the special figure reservation information determination process (step X538) in the special figure starting opening switch common process described above. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In this special figure reservation information determination process, first, it is determined whether it is during the big hit (during the first special game state) (step X541), and when it is during the big hit (step X541; Y), special figure reservation information determination End the process. On the other hand, when the jackpot is not in progress (step X541; N), the starting opening prize flag saved in step X527 of the special figure starting opening switch common processing is checked, and the winning to the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) is performed. (step X542).

In the case of winning the starting slot 1 (step X542; Y), the process proceeds to step X544 and prefetching is performed. On the other hand, if it is not a prize to the starting port 1 (step X542; N),
It is determined whether it is during special figure low probability & no time saving (normal game state) (step X543). And, when there is no special figure low probability & time saving (step X543; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. That is, in the normal game state, a long variation with a very long variation time (about 10 minutes) is selected as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game, but in this case, no prefetching is performed. On the other hand, if there is no special figure low probability & time saving (step X543; N
), it is determined whether it is in the special figure high probability (step X544).

When not in the special figure high probability (step X544; N), it moves to step X548. On the other hand, if it is in the special figure high probability (step X544; Y), is the fall lottery random number value prepared in step X532 of the special figure start opening switch common processing within the range of the judgment value of the fall winning? Determine (step X545). Next, a look-ahead falling lottery information command corresponding to the determination result is prepared (step X546), effect command setting processing (step X547) is performed, and a low probability determination flag is prepared (step X548).

Then, a pre-reading big-hit determination process (step X549) is performed to determine whether or not the big-hit is a big-hit depending on whether or not the big-hit random number value matches the big-hit judgment value (low-probability-hit-hit judgment value). When the determination result is a big hit (step X550; Y), a big hit pattern random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step X551), and prepared in step X530 of the special figure starter switch common processing. Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number (
Step X552) and move to step X559. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step X550; N), the starting opening winning flag saved in step X527 of the special figure starting opening switch common processing is checked, and starting opening 2 (normal fluctuation winning device 37) (step X553).

In the case of not winning the starting slot 2 (step X553; N), set stop symbol information (step X558) and proceed to step X559. On the other hand, in the case of winning to the starting port 2 (step X553; Y), small hit determination processing (step X554) for determining whether the big hit random value matches the small hit determination value or not. I do. and,
When the judgment result is a small hit (step X555; Y), a small hit pattern random number check table is set (step X556), and step X535 of the special figure start opening switch common processing
Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in (step X557),
Go to step X559. On the other hand, if the judgment result is not a small hit (step X555;
In N), set stop symbol information of lost (step X558), and save the stop symbol information acquired at step X552 or X557 or the stop symbol information set at step X558 in the symbol information area (step X558). X559).

After that, the pre-reading stop symbol command (
low probability) is prepared (step X560), effect command setting processing (step X561)
I do.
Next, a high probability determination flag is prepared (step X562), and the prediction big hit determination processing (step X563) determines whether or not the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value (big hit high probability determination value). I do. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step X564; Y), a big hit pattern random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step X565), and the special figure starter switch common processing is performed in step X530. stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is obtained (step X566), and the process proceeds to step X573. On the other hand, if the judgment result is not a big hit (step X564; N)
In, the start opening winning flag saved at step X527 of the special figure starting opening switch common processing is checked, and it is determined whether it is a winning to the starting opening 2 (normal fluctuation winning device 37) (step X567).

In the case of not winning a prize to the starting port 2 (step X567; N), set stop symbol information of a loss (step X572), and shift to step X573. On the other hand, in the case of winning to the starting port 2 (step X567; Y), small hit determination processing (step X568) for determining whether or not the big hit random value matches the small hit determination value. I do. and,
When the judgment result is a small hit (step X569; Y), a small hit pattern random number check table is set (step X570), and step X535 of the special figure start opening switch common processing
Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in (step X571),
Move to step X573. On the other hand, if the judgment result is not a small hit (step X569;
In N), set stop pattern information of the missing (step X572), and determine whether it is in the special figure high probability (step X573).

And when it is not in special figure high probability (step X573; N), it transfers to step X575. On the other hand, if it is in the special figure high probability (step X573; Y), step X55
Overwrite and save the stop symbol information acquired at step X566 or X571 or the stop symbol information set at step X572 in the symbol information area where the stop symbol information was saved at step X574 (step X574). In addition, the stop pattern information saved in the pattern information area is
It is used for the look-ahead of fluctuation patterns.

Next, a look-ahead stop symbol command (
high probability) is prepared (step X575), effect command setting processing (step X576)
I do. Thus, in this embodiment, each time the special figure reservation information determination process is executed, the result determined by the jackpot low probability determination value and the result determined by the jackpot high probability determination value are the production control device 3
00.
Next, a special figure information setting process (step X577) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, is performed, and a variation pattern setting process (step X578) for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game. I do.
Then, prepare a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game (step X579), perform the production command setting process (step X580), and determine the special figure reservation information. End the process. In addition, the special figure information setting process in step X577 and the variation pattern setting process in step X578 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above processing, the prefetch fall lottery information command including the lottery result of the fall lottery for the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory of the lookahead target, and the lookahead stop including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the lookahead target A pattern command and a look-ahead variation pattern command including information on variation patterns in the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory are prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300.例文帳に追加As a result, the result-related information corresponding to the starting memory (whether or not it will fall (whether the probability state of the big hit shifts from a high probability state to a low probability state (normal probability state)), whether it is a big hit or a small hit, etc. , type of variation pattern) determination result (look-ahead result) before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory production control device 30
0, especially by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, and notifying the player of the result related information before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game. It becomes possible to

That is, the game control device 100 serves as determination means capable of determining the result of the variable display game and the variation mode information before the start of the variable display game based on the start memory stored in the start memory means. In addition, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start memory means before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, determines whether or not a special result is obtained). form a means of prejudgment. It should be noted that the time to determine in advance the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is not limited to the time when the starting memory is generated,
Any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is performed.

[Look-ahead big hit determination processing]
FIG. 46 shows the look-ahead big hit determination process (step X
549, X563). In this look-ahead big-hit determination process, first, the lower limit judgment value of the big-hit judgment value is set (step X581), and it is judged whether the value of the target big-hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step X582). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step X582; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a loss is set as the judgment result (step X587), and the look-ahead big-hit judgment processing ends. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the big win was lost.
On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step X582; N), it is judged whether the judgment flag is the high probability judgment flag (step X583). If the judgment flag is a high probability judgment flag (step X583; Y), set the upper limit judgment value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value (step X584), the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit It is determined whether it is greater than the determination value (step X586). On the other hand, if the judgment flag is not the high probability judgment flag (step X583; N), that is, if it is the low probability judgment flag, the upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value is set (step X585). ), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit determination value (step X586).

If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step X586; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, the judgment result is set to be lost (step X587), and the prefetch big hit judgment processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step X586; N), that is, if the game is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the judgment result (step X588), and the look-ahead big-hit judgment processing ends.

[Special figure 1 game processing]
In FIG. 47, special figure 1 game processing (step X112) in the timer interrupt processing described above
showed that. In the special figure 1 game process, the control of the whole process related to the special figure 1 variation display game and the setting of the special figure 1 display are performed. In this special figure 1 game processing, first, it is determined whether or not a special figure 1 interruption flag which is set when the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted is set (step Y100). The special figure 1 variation display game is performed when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game becomes the second special result (minor hit) during execution of the special figure 1 variation display game and the second special game state is executed. , is interrupted during execution of the second special game state.

If the special figure 1 interruption flag is not set (step Y100; N), that is, if the special figure 1 variation display game is not interrupted, the process proceeds to step Y101, and the subsequent special figure 1 variation display Perform processing related to the game. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 suspension flag is set (step Y100; Y), that is, if the special figure 1 variation display game is suspended, the processing relating to the special figure 1 variation display game of steps Y101 to Y115 is performed. Without performing, the process proceeds to step Y116. As a result, while the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted, the special figure 1 variation display game does not progress (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variation display continues.

In the processing related to the special figure 1 variation display game, first, whether the special figure 2 is in the middle of a big hit/minor hit,
That is, it is determined whether the special game state is executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variation display game becoming a big hit or a small hit (step Y101). And when it is during the big hit/minor hit of the special figure 2 (step Y101; Y), it transfers to step Y104. On the other hand, if the special figure 2 big hit/small hit is not in progress (step Y101; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y102) is performed, and the specific area switch monitoring process (step Y103) is performed.

In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the big winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. To monitor and set a large winning opening count command to be transmitted to the production control device 300 based on the winning of the large winning opening, and to close the large winning opening when a prescribed number of winnings have been made to the large winning opening. process. In the special figure 1 game processing, the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variation display game becoming a big hit is performed, and the special figure 2 variation display game result is performed. As for the special game state which is executed based on the big hit or the small hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process to be described later.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the game ball is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (probability operation area). Perform processing to set the region passing flag. Based on the fact that the specific area passage flag is set, a process for generating a special game state is performed.

Then, if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step Y104), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y105). And special figure 1
If the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y105; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step Y116. Also, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y105; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already timed up, the processing corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number is branched. A special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in a register (step Y106).
Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired (step Y107), and the subroutine call by the special figure 1 game process number is performed (
step Y108).

At step Y108, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure 1 variation display game is monitored, the setting of the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure Figure 1
Special figure 1 normal processing (step Y109) for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuation
I do.
In step Y108, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the setting of the stop display time of the special figure 1, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display process, etc. 1 During fluctuation processing (step Y110) is performed.
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big win, setting a fanfare command according to the kind of big win, setting each kind of big win. Special figure 1 display process (
Step Y111) is performed.

In step Y108, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the big winning opening, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, etc. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step Y112).
In step Y108, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, and if the final round, the ending command is set; A large winning opening opening process (step Y113) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

In step Y108, if the special figure 1 game process number is "5", a process of setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening if the big winning round is the final round,
Large winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y114) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 big hit end processing etc. is performed.
At step Y108, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", special figure 1 jackpot end processing (step Y115) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 normal processing (step Y109) I do.

After that, prepare a special figure 1 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (
Step Y116), symbol variation control processing (step Y117) pertaining to the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed, and lever solenoid control processing (step Y
118) to end the special figure 1 game process. This special figure 1 game process constitutes a process of performing a series of execution control relating to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game).

[Tokuzu 2 game processing]
48 and 49 show the special figure 2 game processing (step X113) in the timer interrupt processing described above. In the special figure 2 game processing, the control of the whole process related to the special figure 2 variation display game and the setting of the special figure 2 display are performed. The special figure 2 game process basically performs the same processing as the above-described special figure 1 game process for the special figure 2.

In this special figure 2 game processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, whether a special game state is being executed based on the fact that the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (step Y131). And, if it is during the special figure 1 jackpot (step Y131; Y)
to step Y134. Also, if it is not during the special figure 1 jackpot (step Y1
31;N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y132) and the specific area switch monitoring process (step Y133) are performed.

In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the big winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. To monitor and set a large winning opening count command to be transmitted to the production control device 300 based on the winning of the large winning opening, and to close the large winning opening when a prescribed number of winnings have been made to the large winning opening. process. In the special figure 2 game processing, the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game being a big win or a small win is subjected to a big winning opening switch monitoring process, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display is performed. As for the special game state which is executed based on the result of the game being a big hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-described special figure 1 game process.
In the specific area switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d provided in the first special variable winning device 38 is monitored, and the game ball is specified based on the inflow of the game ball into the specific area (probability operation area). Perform processing to set the region passing flag. A special game state is generated based on the fact that the specific area passing flag is set.

Then, if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step Y134), and it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135). And special figure 2
If the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step Y153. Also, if the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already timed up, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0. (step Y136).

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y136; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y137), and the special figure 2 game processing timer area is extended. The variable timer value (for example, 60000 msec) is saved (step Y138), and the process proceeds to step Y153.
In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variation display game with a high probability of occurrence of small hits in the normal game state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal game state is very long. (for example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at once even if the upper limit value is set as the timer initial value. Therefore, the fluctuation time is measured by a plurality of times of timing using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times of timing for a specified time (for example, 60000 ms).

If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y136; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is stored in the register. Set (step Y139). Then, using the table, acquire the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number (step Y14
0), a subroutine call is made with the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y141).

At step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure 2 variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special Figure 2
Special figure 2 normal processing (step Y142) for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuation
I do.
At step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the setting of the stop display time of the special figure 2, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display process, etc. 2 A process during fluctuation (step Y143) is performed.
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit, setting a fanfare command according to the kind of big win, Special figure 2 display processing (
Step Y144) is performed.

In step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the big winning opening, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, etc. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step Y145).
In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "4", if the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, and if it is the final round, the ending command is set; A large winning opening opening process (step Y146) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

In step Y141, if the special figure 2 game process number is "5", a process of setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening if the big winning round is the final round,
Large winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y147) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 big hit end processing etc. is performed.
At step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "6", special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y148) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108) I do.

In step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small win are performed. Small hit fanfare middle processing (step Y1
49).
At step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "8", a small hit middle process (step Y150) for setting the information necessary for setting the ending command and performing the small hit remaining ball process, etc. conduct.

At step Y141, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "9", the process of setting the time for discharging the remaining balls that have won the prize in the big winning opening during the small winning middle process, or the small winning end. Small hit remaining ball processing (step Y151) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
At step Y141, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", the special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y152) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

After that, prepare a special figure 2 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (
Step Y153), the symbol variation control process (step Y154) pertaining to the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed, and the lever solenoid control process (step Y
155) is performed to end the special figure 2 game process. This special figure 2 game process constitutes a process of performing a series of execution control regarding the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game). The above special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process for special figure 2, and in the following description, special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing corresponding processing will be described in parallel.

[Special figure 1 normal processing]
FIG. 50 shows the special figure 1 normal process (step Y109) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether special figure 1 can start to fluctuate (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate in this determination means that it is not between the stop of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special game state. It should be noted that while the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed or during the special game state based on the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation cannot be started, but in that case, the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. , it is not necessary to make a decision here.

If the special figure 1 is not able to start fluctuation (step Y201; N), set "0" as the special figure 1 game processing number (step Y216), and save the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area. (Step Y217), end the special figure 1 normal processing. Also, when the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handed instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y202).
If the instruction to hit left has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. Also, if the left-handed instruction has not been notified (step Y202; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and effect command setting processing (step Y20
4) is performed to set a left-handed instruction notification flag (step Y205). The left-handed instruction notification flag is designed to be cleared when the specific game state ends, and thereby the left-handed instruction notification is performed when shifting to the normal game state.

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y206), and when the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. Also, if the special figure 1 pending number is not 0 (step Y206; N), prepare a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (step Y207), effect command setting process (step Y2
08). After that, a special figure 1 variation start process (step Y209) for setting information about the special figure 1 variation display game is performed, and a decorative special figure 1 reserved number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number is prepared (step Y210 ), effect command setting processing (step Y211) is performed.
In addition, at the time of performing the processing (step Y210) for preparing the decorative special figure pending number command, the subtraction of the special figure 1 pending number based on the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not performed, and the current special figure 1 pending We are preparing a pending number command corresponding to the special figure 1 pending number minus 1 from the number. Thereafter, a command for the number of remaining games corresponding to the number of time reduction fluctuations is prepared (step Y212), and effect command setting processing (step Y213) is performed.

Next, set the special figure 1 changing in the special figure status area (addition of information) (step Y21
4). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure fluctuation display game, and is 0 to 5
is set. Special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is executed, and the special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 variation display game is being performed, The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed. In addition, the special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are being executed, and the special figure status 4 indicates a first special game state which is a special game state based on a big hit. It indicates that there is, and the special figure status 5 indicates that it is the second special game state which is a special game state based on a small hit. Since the special figure 1 variable display game is started here, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status. After that, the special figure 1 fluctuating process transition setting process (step Y215) is performed, and the special figure 1 usual process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 normal processing]
FIG. 51 shows the special figure 2 normal process (step Y142) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate in this determination means that it is not between the stop of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game that becomes a big hit and the end of the special game state. In addition, it is in a state where the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game or during the special game state based on the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, but in that case the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. , it is not necessary to make a decision here.

If the special figure 2 is not able to start fluctuation (step Y221; N), set "0" as the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y238), and save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area. (Step Y239), end the special figure 2 normal processing. Also, when the special figure 2 can start fluctuation (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether the number of special figure 2 reservations is 0 (step Y222).

And, if the special figure 2 pending number is not 0 (step Y222; N), prepare the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (step Y223), and perform the production command setting process (step Y224). . After that, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step Y225) for setting information related to special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and decoration special figure 2 reservation number command corresponding to special figure 2 reservation number is prepared (step Y226 ), effect command setting processing (step Y227) is performed. In addition, processing to prepare the decoration special figure pending number command (step Y226)
At the time of performing, the special figure 2 reservation number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number minus 1 from the current special figure 2 reservation number are preparing. Thereafter, a command for the number of remaining games corresponding to the number of time reduction fluctuations is prepared (step Y228), and effect command setting processing (step Y229) is performed.

Next, the special figure 2 is set in the special figure status area (information addition) (step Y23
0). Since the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started here, 2 or 3 as a special figure status
is set. After that, the special figure 2 fluctuating process shift setting process (step Y231) is performed, and the special figure 2 usual process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (step Y222; Y), the special figure 1 reservation number is 0
(step Y232). And, if the special figure 1 pending number is 0 (step Y232; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is fluctuating (step Y233). Then, when the special figure 1 is not in fluctuation (step Y233; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (step Y234), and when it has not started (step Y234; N),
Perform processing related to customer waiting state setting. Also, if the number of special figures 1 pending is not 0 (step Y
232; N), when the special figure 1 is fluctuating (step Y233; Y) or when the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step Y234; Y), the process proceeds to step Y238.

In the process for setting the customer waiting state, first, a customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step Y235), a customer waiting demonstration command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y236), and a presentation is performed. Command setting processing (step Y237) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y238. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

In addition, when the production control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the production control device 300 without a backup function loses information on the game state, so that it becomes impossible to perform an appropriate production. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state from the reception of this command, and it is possible to prevent the transmission of the probability information command based on the change in the game state. It is possible to return to the performance corresponding to the game state earlier than waiting.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at the same time, and it is conceivable that the probability state changes depending on the processing of the special figure 1 variation display game. Therefore, the variation start probability information command is transmitted each time the special figure variation display game is started (steps Y207, Y223). Thereby, the production control device 30
At 0, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the game state.

Further, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command each time the special figure fluctuation display game is started, even if the production control device 300 is restarted, the production corresponding to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. can return to the performance corresponding to the game state earlier than waiting for the transmission of the probability information command based on the change of the game state. It should be noted that the customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for returning to the performance corresponding to the game state when the performance control device 300 is restarted.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
In FIG. 52(a), special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step Y2
09) was shown. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. In this special figure 1 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 1 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure reservation information determination process is set (step Y241). Then R
Load random numbers from WM's special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for reservation number 1) and prepare (step Y242), clear the special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for reservation number 1) to 0 (step Y.
243), fall lottery processing for lottery for transition from high probability state to low probability state (step Y24).
4). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here the first among the special figures 1).

Next, the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y245) for setting the losing information or the big hit information as the result information of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed, and the special figure 1 stop related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop pattern (symbol information) is performed. Design setting processing (step Y246) is performed. Then, special figure 1 information setting process (step Y24
7) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (step Y248).

After that, special figure 1 to set the variation pattern which is the variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game
Variation pattern setting processing (step Y249) is performed, variation start information setting processing (step Y250) for setting variation start information for the special figure 1 variation display game is performed, and time reduction variation count update processing (step Y251) is performed. . Next, set "1" for special figure 1 fluctuation processing as the processing number (step Y252), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step Y253).

Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y254), and a signal relating to the start of variation of special symbol 1 (for example, a signal during special symbol 1 variation is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y255). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y256), flashing control timer in the special figure 1 flashing control timer area (special figure 1 indicator 51
flashing cycle timer) save the initial value (here 100 msec) (step Y257
), the initial value ("0" indicating a blank design here) is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern number area (step Y258), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
In FIG. 52(b), special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step Y2
25) was shown. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game. In this special figure 2 fluctuation start process, first, the special figure 2 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure reservation information determination process is set (step Y261). Then R
Load random numbers from WM's special figure 2 fall lottery random number storage area (for reservation number 1) and prepare (step Y262), clear special figure 2 fall lottery random number storage area (for reservation number 1) to 0 (step Y.
263), fall lottery processing for lottery for transition from high probability state to low probability state (step Y26).
4). It should be noted that the reserved number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 2).

Next, the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y265) for setting the loss information, the big hit information or the small hit information as the result information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and the special figure 2 stop pattern (symbol information) is set. Special figure 2 stop design setting processing (step Y266) it does. Then, to perform the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y267) for setting the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern, and to refer to various information related to the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game Prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which the information of is set (step Y268).

After that, special figure 2 to set the variation pattern which is the variation mode in the special figure 2 variation display game
Variation pattern setting processing (step Y269) is performed, variation start information setting processing (step Y270) for setting variation start information for the special figure 2 variation display game is performed, and time reduction variation start update processing (step Y271) is performed. . Next, set "1" for special figure 2 fluctuating processing as the processing number (step Y272), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (step Y273).

Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step Y274), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y275). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y276), blink control timer in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (special figure 2 indicator 52
flashing cycle timer) (step Y277
), the initial value ("0" indicating a blank design here) is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern number area (step Y278), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

In addition, when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game in the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process described above, the information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying the probability setting value, such as selecting a variation pattern according to the probability setting value or changing the selection probability of the variation pattern according to the probability setting value.

[Fall lottery process]
FIG. 53 shows the falling lottery process (steps Y244, Y264) performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this drop lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure high probability is in effect (step Y581), and if not in the special figure high probability (step Y581; N), the drop lottery process is terminated. Also, if it is in the special figure high probability (step Y581; Y)
In step Y582, it is determined whether or not the value of the falling lottery random number is less than the falling lottery lower limit judgment value.
). Winning the drop lottery means that the drop lottery random number matches the drop lottery determination value. The drop lottery determination value is a plurality of continuous values, and the fall lottery random number is equal to or greater than the drop lottery lower limit determination value, which is the lower limit value of the fall lottery determination value, and is the upper limit value of the fall lottery determination value. If it is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value, it is judged that the falling lottery has been won.

If the falling lottery random number is less than the lower limit judgment value for falling lottery (step Y582; Y), that is, if the falling lottery is not won, the falling lottery process is terminated. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, if the fall lottery random number value is not less than the fall lottery lower limit judgment value (step Y582; N), it is determined whether the target fall lottery random number value is greater than the fall lottery upper limit judgment value (step Y583).
If the drop lottery random number is greater than the drop lottery upper limit judgment value (step Y583; Y), that is, if the drop lottery is not won, the drop lottery process is terminated. In this case, the high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, if the drop lottery random number value is not greater than the drop lottery upper limit judgment value (
Step X583; N), that is, when the falling lottery is won, a process for shifting to a low probability state is performed.

In the processing for transitioning to the low probability state, first, a signal regarding high probability termination is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, the big win 2 signal is set to ON, and the big win 4 signal is set to OFF. Next, the signal regarding the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is O
FF, special pattern 2 high probability state signal OFF, special pattern 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal OFF,
The special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is set to OFF.
Then, the signal relating to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y5
86), the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step Y587). After that, save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y588), and end the falling lottery process. As a result, the low-probability state and general/universal electric power non-supported state are established, and the state shifts to the normal game state. In addition, the information of the end of the high probability state and the end of the general electric support is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 3
00 performs processing such as changing the presentation mode based on this information.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 54(a) shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y245) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step Y281). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) and prepare it (step Y282), and clear the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) to 0 ( Step Y283).

After that, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2, which is the result of the big hit determination of the special figure 2 variation display game being executed, is a big hit (step Y284), and if it is a big hit (step Y284; Y)
, the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. That is, both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game which are executed at the same time are not regarded as a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y284; N), a big hit determination process (step Y285) is performed to determine whether or not it is a big hit according to whether the obtained big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y285) is a big hit (step Y286; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y281 (step Y287), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the big hit judgment process (step Y285) is not a big hit (
At step Y286; N), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, the winning information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 54(b) shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y265) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this big-hit flag 2 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small-hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and deviation information is saved in the big-hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, RWM's special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for pending number 1)
Load and prepare the jackpot random number from (step Y293), special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (
1) is cleared to 0 (step Y294).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1, which is the result of the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed, is a big hit (step Y295), and if it is a big hit (step Y295; Y)
to step Y299. That is, both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game which are executed at the same time are not regarded as a big hit. If it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether or not the big hit is a big hit according to whether the acquired big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.
Then, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is a big hit (step Y297; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y292 (step Y298), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is not a big hit (step Y297; N), it is determined whether or not it is a small hit according to whether the acquired big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. A small hit determination process (step Y299) is performed.
Then, when the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y291. Save (step Y301) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (
At step Y300;N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 55 shows the big-hit determination process (steps Y285 and Y296) in the big-hit flag 1 setting process and the big-hit flag 2 setting process. In this jackpot determination process, first,
A lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (step Y311), and it is judged whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y317), and the jackpot judgment process ends. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the big win was lost. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step Y312; N
), it is determined whether it is in the special figure high probability (step Y313).

Then, if it is in the special high probability (step Y313; Y), set the upper limit judgment value in the high probability corresponding to the current probability setting value (step Y314), the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit It is determined whether it is greater than the determination value (step Y316). Also, if it is not in the special high probability (step Y313; N), set the upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the current probability setting value (step Y315), the target jackpot random number value is the upper limit judgment Determine if greater than value (
step Y316).

If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, the judgment result is set to be a loss (step Y317), and the jackpot judgment process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step Y31
6; N), that is, if it is a big hit, set a big hit as the judgment result (step Y
318), the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small hit determination process]
In FIG. 56, small hit determination processing (step Y29
9) was shown. In this small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). It should be noted that the small hit means that the big hit random number (the same random number as the big hit determination) matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and is below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Also, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

If the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a loss is set as the judgment result (step Y323), and the small hit judgment process ends. It should be noted that the loss as a determination result indicates that the lottery for the small prize was lost. Also, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (
Step Y322).

If the value of the big hit random number is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y322; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, set a loss as the judgment result (step Y323), and finish the small hit judgment process. Also, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step Y322; N), that is, if it is a small hit, set the small hit as the judgment result (step Y324), and perform the small hit judgment process. finish.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
In FIG. 57, the special figure 1 stop design setting process (step Y
246). In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), special figure 1
Load the jackpot pattern random number from the jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (step Y3
32). Next, a special figure 1 big hit design table is set (step Y333), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded big hit design random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 1 stop design save area (
step Y334). A jackpot type is selected by this process. In addition, the reason why the stop pattern of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area is when a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that it will be forcibly changed to an out-of-order result.

After that, a special figure 1 big hit stop design information table is set (step Y335), a stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in a special figure 1 stop design pattern area (
Step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure indicator (here special figure 1 indicator 51)
It is for setting the symbols to be stopped on the screen and the symbols to be stopped on the display device 41 . Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y337), the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and the special figure 1 round number Save in the upper limit value information area (step Y338), acquire the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop pattern number, save it in the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area (step Y339), and proceed to step Y340. . These pieces of information are for setting the mode of execution of the special game state.

On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y344), and the losing stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area. Save (step Y345). Next, a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared and saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y340). Thereby, the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. Thereafter, effect command setting processing (step Y341) is performed. Thereby, the decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y342), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y343), and the special figure 1 Stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
In FIG. 58, the special figure 2 stop design setting process (step Y
266). In addition, the special figure 2 stop design setting process performs the same processing as the special figure 1 stop design setting process for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361), and if it is a big hit (step Y3
61; Y), the jackpot pattern random number is loaded from the special figure 2 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (step Y362). Next, set the special figure 2 jackpot pattern table (step Y
363), acquire the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number and save it in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y364). A jackpot type is selected by this process.
In addition, the stop pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area, when the special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game This is because there is a possibility that it will be forcibly changed to an out-of-order result.

After that, set the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table (step Y365), acquire the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number and save it in the special figure 2 stop design pattern area (
Step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure indicator (here, a special figure 2 indicator 52)
It is for setting the symbols to be stopped on the screen and the symbols to be stopped on the display device 41 . Next, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step Y367), the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and the special figure 2 round number Save in the upper limit value information area (step Y368), acquire the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop pattern number, save it in the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area (step Y369), and proceed to step Y370. . These pieces of information are for setting the mode of execution of the special game state.

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y375), and when it is a small hit (step Y375; Y), the special figure 2 small hit pattern random number Load the small hit pattern random number from the storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step Y37
6). Next, a special figure 2 small winning design table is set (step Y377), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded small winning design random number is acquired and saved in a special figure 2 stop design saving area (step Y378). A small hit kind is selected by this process. After that, the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop design pattern area (step Y
379), and proceeds to step Y370.

Also, when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y375; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop pattern withdrawal area (step Y380), and the losing stop pattern pattern is a special figure. 2 Save in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y381). Next, prepare a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and save it in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y370). Thereby, the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set. Thereafter, effect command setting processing (step Y371) is performed. Thereby, the decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the production control device 300 later. Then, the pattern data corresponding to the stop pattern number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y372).
, Clear the special figure 2 big hit pattern random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) to 0 (step Y373), clear the special figure 2 small hit pattern random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) to 0 (step Y374), The stop symbol setting process of FIG. 2 is ended.

Information about the start of the special figure variation display game is set by the above processing. i.e.
Based on the first start memory stored in the first start memory means, the game control device 100 displays the result and the change mode information of the first change display game (special figure 1 change display game) to start the first change display game. It constitutes the first decision means that can be decided previously. In addition, the game control device 100,
Based on the second start memory stored in the second start memory means, the result and change mode information of the second change display game (special figure 2 change display game) can be determined before the start of the second change display game. Form a possible second decision means. Also, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information in the start memory.

From the above, the start winning opening 36 is disposed at a position where the game ball launched to one side of the game area 32 can win, and the normal variable winning device 37 is configured to is placed at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variable display game includes information about the variable time that can specify the execution time of the variable display game, and the second determination in the normal state (normal game state) the variation time that can be determined by the means as the variation time of the second variation display game is longer than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the first variation display game by the first determination means; Become.

Then, the information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 receives the information on the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and responds to the determined fluctuation pattern. Set the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information on the stop pattern, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game Examples include variation commands containing information about patterns. In addition, by transmitting the decoration special figure command earlier than the variation command, the processing in the production control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a first variable display game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. . In addition, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the first variable display game from the whole special figure 1 game processing.
Furthermore, the game control device 100 constitutes a second variation display game execution control means capable of controlling the execution of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. . In addition, it can be said that the second variation display game execution control means performs a series of execution control regarding the second variation display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game processing.

In addition, the game control device 100 transmits the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game determined by the first determination means and the result and variation mode information of the second variation display game determined by the second determination means as control information. As a transmission means capable of transmitting to the production control means (production control device 300). In addition, the game control device 100 starts measuring the variation time according to the start of the variation display game for each of the first variation display game and the second variation display game, and when the measured time has passed the variation time It constitutes a measurement means for ending the measurement of the variation time of the variation display game.

In the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the normal game state, a long fluctuation with a very long fluctuation time is set, but in this case, information about the fluctuation time is not transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the long fluctuation It is also possible to transmit a command only indicating that the In the case of long fluctuation, it is sufficient to simply perform the fluctuation display, and it is not necessary to determine the performance in detail.
The variable time is managed only by the game control device 100, a stop command is transmitted to the performance control device 300 based on the end of the variable time, and the variable display is stopped by the performance control device 300 upon receiving the stop command. make it In this way, the production control device 300
It is possible to reduce the burden of control in

[Special figure 1 information setting process]
In FIG. 59, the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y24
7) was shown. In this special figure 1 information setting process, first, the variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y401), the first half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop pattern pattern,
Obtain the second half offset data (step Y402), special figure 1 jackpot, that is, special figure 1
It is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot stop symbol pattern (step Y403).
If it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y403; Y), the process proceeds to step Y405.

Also, if it is not a special figure 1 big hit (step Y403; N), the value is converted by adding the special figure 1 reservation number to the first half offset data (step Y404). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area (step Y405). As a result, the fluctuation distribution information 1 is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used for selecting a fluctuation group later.

After that, the second half offset data is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (step Y405
), to end the special figure 1 information setting process. As a result, the fluctuation distribution information 2 is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing fluctuations in the second half (types of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group.
In this way, in the special figure 1 variation display game, only the first half variation pattern is determined considering the number of special figure 1 reservations in the case of a loss, and the number of special figure 1 reservations is taken into consideration in the case of a big hit. A variation pattern is determined without

[Tokuzu 2 information setting process]
In Figure 60, special figure 2 information setting process (step Y26
7) was shown. In this special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether it is during special figure low probability & no time saving (normal game state) (step Y421). If it is not in the special low probability & short time (
In step Y421; N), it is determined whether it is the time reduction final variation (step Y427).
. Here, the special figure 2 variable display game to be started from now on is 100 from the end of the special game state.
When it is a special figure variation display game of the times (number of times of support), it is determined that it is the time reduction final variation.

Then, if it is the time reduction final variation (step Y427; Y), step Y42
Go to 8. Also, if it is not the time reduction final variation (step Y427; N), the variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y423), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop pattern pattern are acquired. (Step Y424),
Move to step Y425.

On the other hand, when there is no special figure low probability & time saving (step Y421; Y), it is determined whether it is a high probability final variation (step Y427). Here, when the fall lottery for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be started from now on is won, it is determined to be the high probability final fluctuation.
If it is a high-probability final variation (step Y427; Y), first half offset data and second half offset data for the final variation are set (step Y428), and step Y
Go to 425.
Also, if it is not a high probability final variation (step Y427; N), it is determined whether it is a special figure 2 big hit (step Y429). And if it is not a special figure 2 jackpot (step Y42
In 9; N), set the first half offset data for the special figure 2 loss/small hit at low probability (step Y430), set the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation (step Y432
), the process proceeds to step Y425.

In addition, if the special figure 2 big hit (step Y429; Y), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 big hit at low probability is set (step Y431), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set. (step Y432). Then, the first half offset data is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area (step Y425). As a result, the fluctuation distribution information 1 is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used for selecting a fluctuation group later.

After that, the second half offset data is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (step Y426
), to end the special figure 2 information setting process. As a result, the fluctuation distribution information 2 is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing fluctuations in the second half (types of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group.
Thus, in the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation pattern is determined without considering the number of special figure 2 reservations.

[Special figure 1 variation pattern setting process]
FIG. 61 shows the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step Y249) in the special figure 1 variation start process described above. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation, which is the fluctuation form from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

In this special figure 1 variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group address table is set (step Y451), the address of the second half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y452), and the special The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for reserved number 1) in FIG. 1 (step Y453).
Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is lost, that is, the stop symbol pattern is a lost stop symbol pattern (step Y454), and when the special figure 1 is lost (step Y454; Y),
Byte distribution processing (step Y455) is performed. In addition, when the special figure 1 is not lost (step Y454; N), the distribution process (step Y456) is performed.

In this embodiment, the structure of the second half variation group table is different for winning and losing. Specifically, the size is 1 byte for winning, and 2 bytes for losing. Since the probability of winning is lower than the probability of losing, and even 1 byte is sufficient, the size of the winning is 1 byte from the viewpoint of data capacity saving. Therefore, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used at the time of winning. Also, the probability of losing is higher than the probability of winning, and in order to enable more diverse effects, the size for losing is 2 bytes.

Then, the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the sorting is obtained and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 1 are prepared (step Y458). Next, a sorting process (step Y459) is performed, and the second half variation number obtained as a result of sorting is acquired and saved in the second half variation number area (step Y460). Through this processing, the second half variation pattern is set.

Next, a first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y461), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the determined second half fluctuation number (step Y462). Then, acquire and prepare the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer (
Step Y463), the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the reserved number 1) of the special figure 1 and prepared (step Y464).
After that, the distribution process (step Y465) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y466), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process is completed. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is set.

[Special figure 2 variation pattern setting process]
FIG. 62 shows the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process (step Y269) in the special figure 2 variation start process described above. In this special figure 2 variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group address table is set (step Y471), the address of the second half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y472), and the special Prepare by loading the fluctuation pattern random number 1 from the fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the reserved number 1) in FIG. 2 (step Y
473).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is lost, that is, the stop symbol pattern is a lost stop symbol pattern (step Y474), and when the special figure 2 is lost (step Y474; Y),
Byte distribution processing (step Y475) is performed. Also, when the special figure 2 is not a deviation (step Y474; N), a distribution process (step Y476) is performed.

Then, obtain the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of sorting and prepare it (step Y477), and load the variation pattern random number 2 from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 2 are prepared (step Y478). Next, a sorting process (step Y479) is performed, and the second half variation number obtained as a result of sorting is acquired and saved in the second half variation number area (step Y480). Through this processing, the second half variation pattern is set.

Next, a first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the determined second half fluctuation number (step Y482). Then, acquire and prepare the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer (
Step Y483), the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the reserved number 1) of the special figure 2 and prepared (step Y484).
After that, sorting processing (step Y485) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of being sorted is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y486), and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting processing ends. By this process, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 2 variation display game to be started is set.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 63 shows the fluctuation start information setting process (steps Y250, Y270) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this fluctuation start information setting process, first, the random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y551). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step Y552), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is obtained (step Y553). Further, the second half variation time value table is set (step Y554), and the second half variation time value corresponding to the second half variation number is obtained (step Y555). Then, the first half variable time value and the second half variable time value are added (step Y556), and the added value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (step Y5
57).

In addition, in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the normal game state, a long fluctuation with a very long fluctuation time is set. In this case, the above added value is the specified time (here, 60000m
Seconds), the remainder of the time (
time less than 60000 ms) is calculated as an additional value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y558), and when the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y558; Y), the process proceeds to step Y562. Also, if the information of the special figure 1 is not set (step Y558; N), that is, if the information of the special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 is started (step Y559). A long variation is a variation pattern that is set when the special figure 2 variation display game is in a normal game state, and is determined by the number of the set variation pattern.

And, if it is not the start of the special figure 2 long fluctuation (step Y559; N), 0 to special figure 2
It is saved in the repetition count area of the game processing timer (step Y560). Also, special figure 2
If it is the start of the long fluctuation (step Y559; Y), 9 is saved in the repetition number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y561).

Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step Y562).
, Prepare a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number (step Y563), and perform effect command setting processing (step Y564). Next, the target pending number is updated by -1 (step Y566), the content of the target random number storage area is shifted (step Y566), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step Y567), and the fluctuation start information is set. End the process.

In this embodiment, the number of repetitions is set for the long variation of special figure 2 in order to vary the time that is not enough for a 2-byte timer. In the fluctuation start information setting process, the addition result is 600
Save the 00ms timer and the number of repetitions of 9, and decrement the timer in the timer interrupt process.
set the seconds. As a result, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 long fluctuation is 10 minutes (= 60000 ms ×
10). Since the period of the timer interrupt is 4 milliseconds, it can be set up to about 262 seconds with 2 bytes.

[Processing for updating the number of time reduction fluctuations]
FIG. 64 shows the time reduction variation number update process (steps Y251, Y271) in the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process described above. In this time reduction variation number update process, first, it is determined whether it is in the special figure high probability (in the high probability state) (step Y571), and when it is in the special figure high probability (step Y571; Y), time End the shortened variation count update process. Also, if it is not in the special figure high probability (step Y571; N), it is determined whether it is in the special figure time saving (step Y572). And, if it is not in the special figure time saving (step Y572; N
), the time reduction variation count update process is terminated. In addition, if it is in the special figure time saving (step Y572; Y), the time shortening variation frequency is updated by -1 (step Y573), and it is determined whether the time shortening variation frequency has become "0" (step Y574) .

If the time reduction variation count is not "0" (step A754; N), the time reduction variation count update process is terminated. In addition, when the number of time reduction fluctuations becomes "0" (step Y57
4; Y), a signal related to the end of the time saving (for example, turning off the jackpot 2 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y575), and a signal related to the end of the time saving state (for example,
Special pattern 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, special pattern 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF,
Normal pattern 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is OFF)
is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y576).
Next, save the low probability number in the game state display number area (step Y577), save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y578
), and save the normal pattern no time saving flag in the normal pattern game mode flag area (step Y579
), and terminates the time reduction variation frequency update process.

[Special figure 1 processing during fluctuation]
In FIG. 65, special figure 1 fluctuation process (step Y110) in the special figure 1 game process described above
showed that. In this special figure 1 during fluctuation processing, first, +1 renewal of the number of output times of design determination (step Y621). Then, load and prepare the command from the decoration special figure 1 command area (
Step Y622), effect command setting processing (step Y623) is performed.

Next, to prepare the decoration special figure 1 stop command (step Y624), effect command setting processing (step Y625) is performed. In the game machine of the present embodiment, since there is a case where it is forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of fluctuation, when stopping fluctuation, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 . Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y626). In this embodiment, for example, 600
The display time is set to m seconds, and 2000 m seconds in the case of a big hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is lost, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is lost (step Y627). If the special figure 1 is lost (step Y627; Y), the process proceeds to step Y642. Also, if the special figure 1 is not lost (step Y627;
N), that is, if it is a big hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation display game is also being executed (step Y628). It should be noted that whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

And when the special figure 2 variation display game is not being executed (step Y628; Y), the process proceeds to step Y639. Also, when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y628; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 is being displayed (step Y629). That is, in this case, the special figure 2 being executed is based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit.
This is the case when the variable display game is forced to stop with a losing result. In addition, even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already ended the variable display, but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it will be subject to forced stop.

If the special figure 2 is being displayed during processing (step Y639; Y), the process proceeds to step Y631. In addition, when the special figure 2 is not being displayed during processing (step Y629; N), the number of times of design determination output is updated by +1 (step Y630), and the special figure 1 set above as the display time of special figure 2 A display time of display time + 4 msec is set (step Y631). By setting the display time of special figure 1 display time + 4 ms as the display time of special figure 2, the display time of special figure 1 and special figure 2 will end at the same time. In addition, the display time is reset even when the special figure 2 variable display game is already in the display time, and the display time is newly started. This reset will extend the stop indication time, but it may be shortened in some cases.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y632), and the decoration special figure 2 is set and prepared (step Y633). Then, the symbol command is saved in the decoration special figure 2 command area (step Y634), and the effect command setting process (step Y635) is performed. After that, prepare the decoration special figure 2 stop command (step Y636), perform the production command setting process (step Y638), and perform the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y638).

Then, load the command from the decorative special figure 1 command area and save it in the winning pattern command area (step Y639), load the information from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and save it in the round number upper limit information area (Step Y640), information is loaded from the special figure 1 big winning opening opening information area and saved in the big winning opening opening information area (step Y641). After that, load the information from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and save it in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y642), perform the special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 1 (step Y643), special figure 1
End the display process.

[Special figure 2 processing during fluctuation]
In FIG. 66, special figure 2 during fluctuation processing (step Y143) in the special figure 2 game processing described above
showed that. In this special figure 2 during fluctuation processing, first, +1 renewal of the number of output times of design determination (step Y651). Then, load and prepare the command from the decorative special figure 2 command area (
Step Y652), effect command setting processing (step Y653) is performed.

Next, to prepare the decoration special figure 2 stop command (step Y654), effect command setting processing (step Y655) is performed. Then, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y656). In the present embodiment, for example, the display time is set to 600 ms for a loss, 600 ms for a big hit, and 136 ms for a small hit.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is lost, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is lost (step Y657). If the special figure 2 is lost (step Y657; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. Also, if the special figure 2 is not lost (step Y657;
N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation display game is also being executed (step Y658). It should be noted that whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 1 variation display game is not being executed (step Y658; N), the process proceeds to step Y673. Also, when the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed (step Y658; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit (step Y659). ). If it is not a special figure 2 jackpot (step Y65
9; N), that is, when the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit, the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (step Y670), and the decoration special figure 1 interruption command is prepared (step Y671 ), effect command setting processing (step Y672) is performed, and step Y673
Move to

That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is interrupted based on the fact that the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a small hit. In addition, even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already ended the variable display, but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to interruption. The interrupted special figure 1 variable display game is resumed upon completion of the special game state (second special game state) based on the small hit (second special result).

On the other hand, if it is a special figure 2 big hit (step Y659; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is being displayed (step Y660). That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped with a losing result based on the fact that the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a big hit. In addition, even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already ended the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it will be subject to forced stop.

If special figure 1 is being displayed during processing (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y662. Also, if the special figure 1 is not being displayed during processing (step Y660; N), the number of times the design is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y661), and the special figure 2 set above as the display time of the special figure 1 A display time of display time + 4 msec is set (step Y662). By setting the display time of special figure 2 display time + 4 ms as the display time of special figure 1, the display time of special figure 1 and special figure 2 will end at the same time. In addition, even when the special figure 1 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and the display time is newly started. This reset will extend the stop indication time, but it may be shortened in some cases.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y663), and the decorative special figure 1 miss pattern command is set and prepared (step Y664). Then, the symbol command is saved in the decoration special figure 1 command area (step Y665), and the effect command setting process (step Y666) is performed. After that, prepare the decoration special figure 1 stop command (step Y667), perform the effect command setting process (step Y668), and perform the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 2 (step Y669).

Then, load the command from the decorative special figure 2 command area and save it in the winning pattern command area (step Y673), whether it is a special figure 2 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit Determine (step Y674). If it is a special figure 2 small hit (step Y674; Y), the process proceeds to step Y677. Also, if it is not a special figure 2 small hit (
Step Y674; N), that is, if it is a big hit, load information from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and save it in the round number upper limit information area (step Y675),
Load the information from the special figure 2 big prize opening information area and save it in the big prize opening information area (
Step Y676). After that, load the information from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and save it in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y677), perform the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y678), special figure 2 End the display process.

[Special figure 1 display processing]
In FIG. 67, special figure 1 displaying process (step Y111) in the special figure 1 game process described above
showed that. In this special figure 1 display process, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y7
51), clear the jackpot flag 1 area (step Y752). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is big hit information (step Y753).
, If the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y753; Y), a test signal related to the start of the special figure 1 variation display game big hit (special figure 1 big hit) (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the special symbol 1 hit signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y754)
.

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared (step Y755), and the production command setting process (step Y756).
I do. Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y757), and effect command setting processing (step Y758) is performed.
Next, the big prize opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y759). In the case of this embodiment,
2 big win signals and 3 big win signals are saved as the signals corresponding to the information on the opening of the big winning opening and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, jackpot fanfare time (for example, 100 ms) corresponding to the big winning mouth opening information
is set (step Y760), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y761). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y762) and saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y763). Further, the fanfare/interval process transition setting process (step Y764) is performed,
End the special figure 1 displaying process.

On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y753; N), that is, a big hit flag 1
If is outlier information, it is determined whether it is a high probability final variation (step Y765), and if it is not a high probability final variation (step Y765; N), it is determined whether it is a time reduction final variation (step Y766). . Here, when the fall lottery for the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is won, it is determined to be the high probability final variation. Also, when the special figure 1 variation display game being executed is the 100th special figure variation display game (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time reduction final variation.

If it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y765; N) or if it is not a time-reduction final variation (step Y766; N), the process proceeds to step Y774. In addition, if it is a high probability final variation (step Y765; Y) or if it is a time reduction final variation (step Y766; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y767), and an effect command Setting processing (step Y768) is performed. Next, save the probability state command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y769), clear the left-handed instruction notification flag (step Y770), and whether it is a small hit of special figure 2, that is It is determined whether or not the special game state is executed based on the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becoming a small hit (step Y771).

When it is during the small hit of the special figure 2 (step Y771; Y), it transfers to step Y774. On the other hand, if it is not during the small hit of special figure 2 (step Y771; N), the signal relating to the instruction to hit to the left is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y772). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be OFF. Then, the left-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y773). As a result, the first game state display unit 5
6 is turned off, and the display instructs left-handed hitting. After that, clear (information subtraction) during special figure 1 fluctuation in the special figure status area (step Y774), save the special figure 1 normal processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y775), special figure 1 End the display process.

[Special figure 2 display process]
FIG. 68 and FIG. 69 show the special figure 2 displaying process (step Y144) in the special figure 2 game process described above. It should be noted that special figure 2 during display processing, processing equivalent to the above-mentioned special figure 1 during display processing, is intended to perform the special figure 2 as a target. In this special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag 2 areas are cleared (step Y812).

Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y813), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is big hit information (step Y815), and when the special figure 2 is a big hit (step Y815; Y), the special figure 2 variation display game A test signal (for example, condition device operating signal ON, special symbol 2 winning signal ON) regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared (step Y817), and the production command setting process (step Y818).
I do. Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y819), and effect command setting processing (step Y820) is performed.
Next, the big prize opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area (step Y821). In the case of this embodiment,
2 big win signals and 3 big win signals are saved as the signals corresponding to the information on the opening of the big winning opening and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, jackpot fanfare time (for example, 100 ms) corresponding to the big winning mouth opening information
is set (step Y822), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y823). Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y824) and saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y825). Further, the fanfare/interval process transition setting process (step Y826) is performed,
End the special figure 2 displaying process.

On the other hand, if the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N), that is, a big hit flag 2
is loss information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information) (step Y827). And, if the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y8
27; Y), it is determined whether it is a high probability final variation (step Y828), and if it is not a high probability final variation (step Y828; N), it is determined whether it is a time reduction final variation (step Y829). Here, when the drop lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is won, it is determined that it is the high probability final variation. Also, when the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is the special figure variation display game of the 100th time (the number of times of support) from the end of the special game state, it is determined to be the time reduction final variation.

If it is not a high-probability final change (step Y828; N) or if it is not a time-reduction final change (step Y829; N), the process proceeds to step Y834. In addition, if it is a high probability final variation (step Y828; Y) or if it is a time reduction final variation (step Y829; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y830), and a production command Setting processing (step Y831) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y832), and the left hitting instruction notification flag is cleared (step Y833).
In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the occurrence of the small win opens the big winning opening, but the player is not made aware of the occurrence of the small win. In order to do so, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.

Next, a command is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared (step Y834),
Effect command setting processing (step Y835) is performed. Furthermore, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y836), effect command setting processing (step Y837) is performed, and a signal relating to the instruction to hit to the right is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y838).
). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Then, the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y839). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned on to display an instruction to hit to the right.
After that, the lower special winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step Y840), the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y841), and special figure 2
Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing (step Y857) is performed, and processing during special figure 2 display is completed.

Also, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y827; N), it is determined whether it is a high probability final variation (step Y843), and if it is not a high probability final variation (step Y84
3;N), it is determined whether or not it is the time reduction final variation (step Y844). Here, when the drop lottery for the special figure 2 variation display game being executed is won, it is determined that it is the high probability final variation. Also, the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is 100 times from the end of the special game state (
If it is a special figure variation display game of support number), it is determined that it is a time reduction final variation.

If it is not a high-probability final variation (step Y843; N) or if it is not a time-reduction final variation (step Y844; N), the process proceeds to step Y850. In addition, if it is a high probability final variation (step Y843; Y) or if it is a time reduction final variation (step Y844; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y845), and a production command Setting processing (step Y846) is performed. Next, the probability state command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step Y847), and the signal regarding the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to be OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned off, and the display instructs the player to hit left. After that, clear (information subtraction) during special figure 2 fluctuation in the special figure status area (step Y850), save the special figure 2 normal processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y851), special figure 2 End the display process.

That is, the game control device 100 generates the first special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened with the operation of the condition device based on the first special result of the variable display game. second special game generating means for generating a second special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened without operating the conditional device based on the second special result of the variable display game. Eggplant.

[Fanfare/interval processing]
70 and 71 show the fanfare/interval process (steps Y112, Y145) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process. In this fanfare/interval processing, it is first determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y941), and if the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step Y941; N), the fanfare/interval processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the remaining ball counter is 0 (step Y941; Y), it is determined whether it is the first round (step Y942).

If it is not the first round (step Y942; N), the process proceeds to step Y950. On the other hand, if it is the first round (step Y942; Y), it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 (step Y943). Here, in the present embodiment, the special game state is started by the game ball passing through the normal figure start gate 34 after the big hit (first special result) is derived in the special figure variation display game. there is

If there is no game ball passing through the normal pattern starting gate 34 (step Y943; N), the fanfare/interval processing is terminated. On the other hand, when there is a game ball passing through the normal figure start gate 34 (step Y943; Y), the round number upper limit table is set (step Y944), and the round number upper limit corresponding to the round number upper limit information A value (10 in this embodiment) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area (step Y945). Furthermore, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y946).

Next, the area for the number of fraudulent prizes won is cleared (step Y947), and the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area for the top major winning opening (step Y948). After that, the ON output data of the continuous operating device operating signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y949), and the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step Y950).
. Then, a round command corresponding to the special prize opening opening information and the number of rounds is prepared (step Y951), and effect command setting processing (step Y952) is performed.

Next, the initial value of the jackpot process control pointer corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y953), the pointer initial value is saved in the jackpot step control pointer area (step Y954), and the jackpot is won. A large winning opening opening time corresponding to the opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y955). As the initial value of the process control pointer during the big hit, 0 is set when opening and closing are repeated in one round. In the present embodiment, long opening with V corresponds. Also, when opening once in one round, the end value of the jackpot operation (
In this embodiment, 2) is set. Note that the initial value may be set to a value other than 0 according to the number of openings and closings in one round.

Next, it is determined whether it is a lever solenoid operation round (step Y956). A lever solenoid operation round is a round in which the lever solenoid 38f is operated to operate the lever member, and in the case of the present embodiment, it is only the first specific round. If it is the lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; Y), the operation data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y957). As a result, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared. On the other hand, if it is not a lever solenoid operation round (step Y956; N),
Stop data for the lever solenoid is set (step Y958).

After that, 4 is set as the processing number (step Y959), and it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y960). And, if it is a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y960;
In Y), the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y961), and the big winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 1 game process timer area (step Y962). on the other hand,
If it is not a special figure 1 jackpot (step Y960; N), that is, if it is a special figure 2 jackpot, the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y963), and the big winning opening time It is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y964).

Then, save the signal related to the opening start of the upper prize-winning hole in the test signal output data area (
Step Y965). Here, the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1 is set to ON. Next, the first
In order to open the opening and closing member of the special variable prize winning device 38, the upper large prize winning opening ON data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y966), and the large winning opening count number for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening is cleared (step Y967), and the fanfare/during interval processing ends.

In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, in the special game state (first special game state) based on the big hit, only the upper big winning opening (first special variation device 38) is opened,
In the special game state (second special game state) based on the small hit, only the lower big winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is opened, but it is not limited to this. For example, the opening/closing mode in the first special game state may be a mode in which the upper big prize winning opening is opened in the first round and the lower big winning opening is opened in the second and subsequent rounds.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 72 shows special figure 1 jackpot end processing (step Y11
5) was shown. In this special figure 1 jackpot end processing, first, a subroutine call is performed by the time reduction determination data (step Y1101). If the time reduction determination data at step Y1101 does not have time reduction, the jackpot end setting processing 1 (step Y1102) is performed, and if the time reduction determination data has time reduction at step Y1101, the jackpot end setting processing 2 ( Step Y1103) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is specific area passage information (step Y1104). In this embodiment, the specific area passage flag is set when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variable operating area),
If the specific area passage flag is set, it is determined that there is specific area passage information. If there is no specific area passage information (step Y1104; N), the process proceeds to step Y1106. On the other hand, when there is specific area passage information (step Y1104; Y), big hit end setting processing 3 (step Y1105) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y1106), and the game ball to the specific area (probability variable operation area) in the special game state based on the normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot in the case of this embodiment) (step Y1107).

If it is not the specific area irregular passage (step Y1107; N), step Y1
109. On the other hand, in the case of irregular passing through the specific area (step Y1107;
In Y), irregular probability information is added to the probability information command (step Y1108
), effect command setting processing (step Y1109) is performed. A probability information command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 by the process of step Y1109. As the probability information command to be sent here, there are multiple commands that include information on the production mode in either "high probability / time saving", "low probability / time saving", or "low probability / no time saving". Yes, irregular probability information is added in the case of probability variation operating area irregular passage.

Next, set "0" relating to special figure 1 normal processing as the processing number (step Y1110),
The process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1111). Next, a signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1112).
Here, the big win 1 signal and the big win 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1113). here,
Condition device operating signal, accessory continuous operating device operating signal, special symbol 1 per signal and special symbol 2
Set the winning signal to OFF.

Next, save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (step Y1114),
Save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the upper grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1
115), clear the special figure status area (step Y1116). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed. And special figure 2 game wait time value (
For example, 8 m seconds) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1117), and the special figure 1 jackpot ending process is terminated.

By performing this special figure 1 jackpot end processing, it is possible to start the special figure variation display game for both special figures 1 and 2, but in the timer interrupt process, the special figure 2 game is performed after the special figure 1 game process. In order to perform the processing, the processing for starting the special figure fluctuation display game is performed in the special figure 2 game processing with the timer interrupt that performed the special figure 1 jackpot end processing, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed rather than the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. will be able to start earlier. Therefore, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step Y1117,
The start processing of the special figure 2 variation display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing, and the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.
That is, the game control device 100 keeps the second variable display game execution control means in the second variable display game execution control means until the first variable display game execution control means can execute the processing related to the start of the first variable display game after the special game state ends. 2. Game processing standby means for preventing the processing related to the start of the variable display game from becoming executable.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 73 shows special figure 2 jackpot end processing (step Y14
8) was shown. The special figure 2 jackpot end process is step Y110 in the special figure 1 jackpot process described above.
Equivalent processing is performed except that 9 is not performed. In this special figure 2 jackpot end processing, first, a subroutine call is performed by the time reduction determination data (step Y1131). Step Y113
If the time reduction determination data is no time reduction in 1, jackpot end setting processing 1 (step Y1
132) is performed, and when the time reduction determination data indicates that there is a time reduction at step Y1131, a jackpot end setting process 2 (step Y1133) is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is specific area passage information (step Y1134), and if there is no specific area passage information (step Y1134; N), the process proceeds to step Y1136. On the other hand, when there is specific area passage information (step Y1134; Y), big hit end setting processing 3 (step Y1135) is performed. Then, the probability information command is loaded from the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y1136), and the game ball to the specific area (probability variable operation area) in the special game state based on the normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot in the case of this embodiment) (step Y1137).

If it is not specific area irregular passage (step Y1137; N), step Y1
139. On the other hand, in the case of irregular passing through the specific area (step Y1137;
In Y), irregular probability information is added to the probability information command (step Y1138
), effect command setting processing (step Y1139) is performed. A probability information command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 by the process of step Y1139. As the probability information command to be sent here, there are multiple commands that include production mode information in either "high probability / time saving", "low probability / time saving", or "low probability / no time saving". Yes, irregular probability information is added in the case of probability variation operating area irregular passage.

Next, set "0" relating to special figure 2 normal processing as the processing number (step Y1140),
The process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1141). Next, a signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1143).
Here, the big win 1 signal and the big win 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1143). here,
Condition device operating signal, accessory continuous operating device operating signal, special symbol 1 per signal and special symbol 2
Set the winning signal to OFF.

Next, save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (step Y1144),
The flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y11
45), the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1146), and the special figure 2 big hit ending process is terminated. By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status becomes 0, which indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed.

[Jackpot end setting process 1]
FIG. 74(a) shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (steps Y1102, 1132) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal relating to the start of no time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1151). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to OFF. At this point, only the data is set and not output.

Next, a signal relating to the start of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1152). Here, special symbol 1 high probability state signal, special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal, special symbol 2 variable time shortened state signal, normal symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal and ordinary electric accessories 1 Set the open extended state signal to OFF.
After that, save the number without time saving in the game state display number area (step Y1153),
Save the general pattern time saving flag in the general pattern game mode flag area (step Y1154)
. Next, save the special figure low probability and no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1155), and set the time reduction variation number area to 0 for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the time saving state Clear (step Y1156).

Next, the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1
157). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Next, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1158). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned off, and the display instructs the player to hit left. After that, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y1159), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is ended. By this processing, the normal game state is entered.

[Jackpot end setting process 2]
FIG. 74(b) shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (steps Y1103, 1133) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1
161). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. It should be noted that the big win 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, a signal relating to the start of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1162). Here, special symbol 1 high probability state signal, special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal, special symbol 2 variable time shortened state signal, normal symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal and normal electric accessories 1 Set the open extension status signal to ON.
After that, save the number with time saving in the game state display number area (step Y1163),
Save the normal map time saving flag in the normal game mode flag area (step Y1164)
. Next, save the special figure low probability and time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1165), and initialize the time reduction variation number area for managing the number of times of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state Save the value (step Y1166). In this embodiment, the number of times of support is 100, so 100 is saved as the initial value in step Y1166.

Then, the probability information command (time saving) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step Y1167), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. By this process, it becomes the second specific game state with a special figure low probability. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, it is a right-handed mode during the time saving state,
Since the right hitting mode is set from the middle of the big win, the right hitting is not set in the big win end setting process 2.例文帳に追加

[Jackpot end setting process 3]
FIG. 75 shows the big hit end setting process 3 (steps Y1105, Y1135) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process. In this jackpot end setting process 3, first, a signal related to the start of the special figure time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1
171). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. It should be noted that the big win 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, save the signal related to the start of high probability & time saving in the test signal output data area (
Step Y1172). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal are set to ON. After that, save the number with time saving in the game state display number area (step Y1173
), save the special figure high probability and time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1174).

Next, a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1
175). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, game state display number 2
The number in the right hitting state is saved in the area (step Y1176). As a result, the first game state display section 56 is turned on to display an instruction to hit to the right. After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery (step Y1177), and the jackpot end setting process 3 is finished. This processing results in a high-probability state. That is, by executing the jackpot end setting process 3 after the jackpot end setting process 1, it becomes the first specific game state,
By executing the jackpot end setting process 3 after the jackpot end setting process 2, the second special figure high probability
It becomes a specific game state.
By the above processing, it becomes possible to set the specific game state, which is a high probability state, after the first special game state ends. That is, the game control device 100 is a specific game state (first specific game state ST2, second specific game state ST3 with a high probability of special symbols) in which the probability that the result of the special variation display game is a special result is higher than the normal state. constitutes a specific game state generating means capable of generating

[Processing during small win fanfare]
FIG. 76 shows the small hit fanfare process (step Y149) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this small-hit fanfare mid-process, first, a small-hit opening command for opening the lower big winning opening is prepared (step Y1201), and effect command setting processing (step Y1202) is performed. Next, set 8 for small hit middle processing as the processing number (step Y1203), and save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1204
).

Next, the small hit opening time (for example, 1600 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1205), and the signal related to the start of the small hit operation (the special electric accessory 2 in operation signal is turned ON) is the test signal Save in the output data area (step Y1206). and,
Save the lower prize winning opening ON data in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y12
07), the large winning opening count area for counting the number of winnings to the big winning opening is cleared (step Y1208), and the process during the small winning fanfare ends.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
In FIG. 77, special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y15
2) was shown. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 for special figure 2 normal processing is set as the processing number (step Y1331), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1332).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the small win is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y
1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, save the fraud monitoring period flag in the lower big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), save the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (step Y1335), and clear the special figure status area ( Step Y1336). By clearing the special status area,
The special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variation display game nor the special figure 2 variation display game is executed.

Next, it is determined whether it is during special low probability & no time saving (during normal game state) (step Y133
7), if not in special low probability & short time (step Y1337; N), step Y
Go to 1340. Also, if there is no special low probability & time saving (step Y1337;
In Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y
1338). Here, the firing position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1339), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted (step Y1340).

And, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not interrupted (step Y1340; N),
The special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1343), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (step Y1340; Y
) prepares the decoration special figure 1 restart command (step Y1341), and performs the production command setting process (step Y1342). After that, clear the special figure 1 game interruption flag area (
Step Y1343), end the special figure 2 small hit end processing. As a result, the interrupted special figure 2 variation display game is restarted with the end of the special game state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variation display game.

That is, the game control device 100 controls the execution of the first variable display game (game control device 1
00) or the second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100), the execution of one of the variable display games is controlled by the variable display game execution control means.
When the other variable display game whose execution is controlled by the other variable display game execution control means results in a special result, the one variable display game is interrupted and the special game state based on the other variable display game is entered. It constitutes restart control means capable of executing restart control for restarting one of the variable display games that has been interrupted after the end of the game.

Next, control by the production control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 78 and timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 78, in the main processing, processing at the start of the program is first performed. In this process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, allow generation of display data (step C
5) A random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power outage detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the program start processing from steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, an input signal (
Effect button input processing (step C9) for creating input information from the rising edge) is performed. Inputs from the performance button 25 and the cross key 29 are read in timer interrupt processing, and in this performance button input processing, when there is an input from the performance button 25 or the cross key 29, processing for changing the content of performance, etc. is performed. .

Then, the setting of the changeable range such as the brightness of the LED and liquid crystal, the volume, etc., and the LED
A hall/player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness of the liquid crystal, the volume, etc. is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to commands from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) is performed for editing settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect. ) to set the completion of drawing command preparation (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the content to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data for the screen to be drawn within 0 seconds (approximately 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to switch frames (step C15). In this embodiment, the V blank interrupt (1/6
0 second) is entered twice, it is determined that it is the frame switching timing. Note that the frame switching timing can be changed arbitrarily. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 second, or image updating (frame switching) may be performed at a timing later than 1/60 second. switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined at step C15 that it is time to switch frames (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, sound control processing (step C17) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), decoration control processing (step C17) for controlling LEDs such as the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 C18), a movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 and the reel 6 is performed, and the board for controlling effects by the notification unit 72, the point notification unit 73, the cumulative value notification unit 74, etc. The effect setting process (step C20) is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check processing]
FIG. 79 shows received command check processing in the main processing described above. In this received command check processing, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception count (
Step C201), determine whether or not the command reception count is 0 (step C202)
. If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, copy the contents of the receive command buffer to the command area (step C204
), the command read index is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether or not copying of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C206).
Thus, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer,
The content of the received command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. Thereby, in preparation for the case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during command analysis, the command (data
can be moved to create space. In addition, command analysis can be collectively performed for each round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that copying of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of commands for the number of commands received has been completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the command analysis for the number of commands received has not been completed (step C210; N),
The process returns to step C207. Also, when it is determined that the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 80 shows received command analysis processing in the received command check processing described above. In this received command analysis processing, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (steps C232 and C233). ). MODE and A
When CT is determined to be within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y)
Then, it is determined whether or not the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C23
4).

In addition, when it is determined in steps C232 and C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C2
34;N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (
At step C234; Y), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). Variation system command is a command to command the variation pattern of special figure. Then, if it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235
At ;Y), the variable command processing (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variable command (
At step C235; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the jackpot commands (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) during a big win, or a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, end screen, etc.) during a small win. and MO
When it is determined that the DE is within the range of the big-hit command (step C237; Y), the big-hit command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined at step C237 that the MODE is not within the range of the jackpot commands (step C237; N), it is determined whether or not the MODE is within the range of the symbol commands (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special figure (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special figure). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command (step C239; Y), symbol-based command processing (
Step C240) is performed to terminate the received command analysis process.

Also, in step C239, if it is determined that MODE is not within the range of the symbol-based command (
At step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as the pending number command and error command (step C241). A single command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The single-shot commands include a customer waiting demo command, a pending number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error/illegal command, and a model designation command. Then, if it is determined that MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C24
1; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (
At step C241; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; Y), look-ahead symbol system command processing (step C2
44) to end the received command analysis process.

Also, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead variation system command (step C245). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; Y), prefetch variation command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated. Also, in step C245,
If it is determined that the MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; N)
, the received command analysis process is terminated.

In addition, the look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. Pre-reading effect (also called pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether the special figure fluctuation display game will be a big hit when the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) is executed after that. (or what kind of variation pattern it will be), in order to notify the player in advance with a predetermined reliability, display the decoration special figure start memory display etc. displayed on the display device 41 in a manner different from usual, It is a production such as performing a production display on The look-ahead system command (a look-ahead variation system command and a look-ahead pattern system command) is a command to inform in advance of the variation pattern and the stop design corresponding to the start memory to be the target of the look-ahead effect, and is sent from the game control device 100 at the time of start winning. It is transmitted to the production control device 300 . It should be noted that normal variation-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

<Look-ahead performance>
The production control device 300 can execute a pending change production that changes the display mode of the decoration special figure start storage display as a look-ahead production.
FIG. 81 shows an example of the pending change effect. First, a predetermined game state (for example, normal game state S
The display on the display device 41 at T1) will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 81(a), in the central portion of the display area of the display device 41, a decoration special figure variation display game display section 81 for displaying a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the main variation is provided. In the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 81, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed by stopping display after the decoration identification information is variably displayed in each of the left, middle and right variation display areas.

At the bottom of the display area of the display device 41, there is provided a standby pending display section 82 for displaying a decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the undigested starting memory. The decoration special figure starting memory display displayed in the standby holding display unit 82 corresponds one-to-one with the starting memory corresponding to the main variation, and is displayed side by side in the order of storage. In the example shown in FIG. 81, It shows that there are three starting memories corresponding to the main variation. The decoration special figure start memory display on the left end is the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory stored first, and is designed to shift to the left each time it is digested. again,
In the standby pending display section 82, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure variation display game corresponding to each starting memory, the result of the prefetching such as the variation pattern, etc. by its display mode.

On the left side of the standby pending display portion 82, there is provided an active pending display portion 83 for displaying information related to starting memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed. The decoration special figure starting memory display at the left end of the waiting pending display portion 82 is shifted to the running pending display portion 83 at the start of the main variation. In addition, in the in-execution suspension display section 83, it is possible to suggest the result of the main variation to be executed, the variation pattern, etc. by its display mode.

The effect control device 300 executes an operation promoting effect for prompting the player to operate the effect button 25 before executing the pending change effect. In the operation promotion effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 84a, an effect button image 84a imitating the effect button 25, and a notification image 84b (for example, a time bar image) for notifying the remaining length of the operation valid period.
Then, an operation prompting image 84 including a designation image 84c designating the operation mode of the effect button 25 (for example, a character image such as "Press!"

Then, the effect control device 300 presses the effect button 25 in the operation mode specified during the operation valid period.
is operated, the pending change performance is executed, while the pending change performance is not executed when the performance button 25 is not operated in a designated operation mode during the operation effective period. In the pending change effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 81(c), among the decorative special figure starting memory displays displayed in the standby pending display unit 82, the decoration special corresponding to the starting memory to be the target of the pending change effect The display mode (eg, color) of the figure-start memory display changes from the normal display mode (eg, white) to a specific display mode (eg, red or blue).

In this embodiment, the color of the decorative special figure starting memory display is such that the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation for a big hit (or the degree of expectation for a predetermined variation pattern)) increases in the order of white < blue < red. .
Hereinafter, the red decoration special figure start memory display is called "red reservation", and the blue decoration special figure start memory display is called "blue reservation".
In addition, the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display that changes with the pending change production is not limited to the color of the decorative special figure starting memory display. That is, in the pending change effect, the color of the decorative special figure starting memory display may change, the shape of the decorative special figure starting memory display may change, and the size of the decorative special figure starting memory display may change. Also, at least two of the color, shape, and size of the decoration special figure starting memory display may change.
Further, when the production button 25 is not operated in the designated operation mode during the operation valid period, the pending change production may be executed after the operation valid period ends.
Alternatively, the pending change effect may be executed without executing the operation prompting effect.

<Reach production>
The production control device 300 has a normal reach production and a weak SP ready-to-win production (for example, a special 1 ready-to-win production) with a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach production.
and a strong SP ready-to-win effect (for example, a special 3 ready-to-win effect) with a higher expectation of a big win than the weak SP ready-to-win effect.
Effect control device 300, for example in the variation system command processing (step C236) of the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 80), sets the information for performing the effect according to the variation system command from the game control device 100. Specifically, when the variation command from the game control device 100 is a variation command including information on a variation pattern for executing a ready-to-win effect, information for performing a ready-to-win effect is set. As a result, the ready-to-win effect is executed in the special figure variation display game to be started from now on.

Here, the variation patterns for executing the ready-to-win performance include at least a variation pattern to end with a normal ready-to-win performance, a variation pattern to end with a weak SP ready-to-win performance, and a variation pattern to end with a strong SP ready-to-win performance.
Furthermore, the variation patterns ending with the weak SP ready-to-win effect include at least a pattern to execute the weak SP ready-to-win effect after the execution of the normal ready-to-win effect and a pattern to immediately execute the weak SP ready-to-win effect without executing the normal ready-to reach effect. .
In addition, there are at least pattern A, pattern B, pattern C, and pattern D as the variation patterns ending with the strong SP ready-to-win effect.

Pattern A executes a weak SP reach effect after executing a normal reach effect, and the weak SP
This is a pattern in which the strong SP ready-to-win effect is executed after the ready-to-win effect is executed.
An example of pattern A is shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 82(a), when the special figure fluctuation display game ends, the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed in the in-execution suspension display section 83 disappears.
Then, when the next special figure fluctuation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. display is performed. Here, the result of the special figure variation display game, the variation pattern, etc. are suggested in the same manner as the look-ahead effect in the pending display portion 83 during execution. Also, in the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 81, a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is started, and the variation display of the decoration identification information is performed in each of the left, middle and right variation display areas. be started.

Then, when the special figure variation display game is a special figure variation display game that executes a pattern A strong SP ready-to-win production, when the first half variation ends, the normal ready-to-win production starts, for example, as shown in FIG. Then, the same ornament identification information is temporarily stopped in the left variation display area and the right variation display area of the decoration special figure variation display game display section 81 . In the temporarily stopped state, the decoration identification information is displayed so as to sway, indicating that it has not stopped completely.
Then, developing into a weak SP reach effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. It is moved to the left and right corners, and the development pattern or the like is displayed in the center of the display area.

Then, it develops into a strong SP reach effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. While moving to the left and right corners, an effect by a character or the like is displayed in the central portion of the display area.
Then, when the latter half of the variation is completed, the result of the special figure variation display game is displayed on the decorative special figure variation display game display section 81, for example, as shown in FIG. 82(h), and the special figure variation display game ends. do.

Pattern B is a pattern in which the strong SP ready-to-win effect is executed without executing the weak SP ready-to-win effect after the execution of the normal ready-to-win effect.
An example of pattern B is shown in FIG. FIG. 83 differs from FIG. 82 only in the absence of FIGS. 82(d) and (e), and the other points are the same as FIG. 82, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Pattern C is a pattern in which the strong SP ready-to-win effect is suddenly executed without executing the normal ready-to-win effect and the weak SP ready-to-win effect.
An example of pattern C is shown in FIG. FIG. 84 differs from FIG. 82 only in the absence of FIGS. 82(c), (d), and (e).

Further, pattern D is a pattern in which a strong SP ready-to-win effect is executed after execution of a pseudo-continuous effect in which the ornament identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed again in the middle of the special figure variable display game, and then the re-variation effect is performed one or more times. be. In pattern D, the normal ready-to-win effect and the weak SP ready-to-win effect are not executed.
An example of pattern D is shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 85(a), when the special figure variation display game ends, the decorative special figure start memory display displayed in the execution pending display section 83 disappears.
Then, when the next special figure fluctuation display game starts, for example, as shown in FIG. display is performed. Here, the result of the special figure variation display game, the variation pattern, etc. are suggested in the same manner as the look-ahead effect in the pending display portion 83 during execution. Also, in the decoration special figure variation display game display section 81, a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is started, and the variation display of the decoration identification information is performed in each of the left, middle and right variation display areas. be started.

Then, if the special figure variation display game is a special figure variation display game that executes a strong SP ready-to-win effect of pattern D, when the first half variation ends, the pseudo-continuous effect starts, for example, FIG. 85 (
As shown in c), after the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the decoration special figure variation display game display portion 81 in a result mode other than the winning result mode, for example, FIG. (d)
As shown in , re-variation display of decoration identification information is started in each of the left, middle and right variation display areas of the decoration special figure variation display game display section 81 .
Then, it develops into a strong SP reach effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. It is moved to the left corner and the right corner, and an effect by a character or the like is displayed in the central part of the display area.
Then, when the second half variation ends, the result of the special figure variation display game is displayed on the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 81, for example, as shown in FIG. 85(g), and the special figure variation display game ends. do.

In addition, the variation pattern that ends with the normal reach effect described above is, for example, FIG.
→(b)→(c)→(h).
In addition, among the variation patterns ending with the weak SP ready-to-win effect described above, the pattern of executing the weak SP ready-to-win effect after executing the normal ready-to-win effect is, for example, FIG.
The pattern is c)→(d)→(e)→(h).
In addition, among the fluctuation patterns ending with the weak SP ready-to-win production described above, the pattern of suddenly executing the weak SP ready-to-win production without executing the normal ready-to-win production is, for example, Fig. 82(a) →
The pattern is (b)→(d)→(e)→(h).

In addition, FIG. 85 shows a pseudo-continuous effect in which the number of re-fluctuation effects (effects in which the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped and then re-varying is displayed) is once. The number of times of production may be plural times.
In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 82 to 85, the result of the special figure variation display game, the variation pattern, etc. are suggested in the same manner as the look-ahead effect in the pending display section 83 during execution. in particular,
Decoration special figure start memory display of specific display mode (red reservation (decorative special figure start memory display with hatching in the figure) and blue reservation (decorative special figure start memory display with polka dot hatching in the figure)) , from the standby pending display portion 82 to the executing pending display portion 83 . That is, FIGS. 82 to 85 exemplify the case where the ready-to-win effect is executed in the special figure fluctuation display game that is the target of the pending change effect, but of course, the special figure fluctuation display game that is not the target of the pending change effect It is also possible to execute a reach effect in .

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 82 to 85, the effect mode of the normal reach effect executed when the pattern A is set (FIG. 82(c)) and the effect of the normal reach effect executed when the pattern B is set Although the aspect (FIG. 83(c)) is the same, the pattern A and the pattern B may be different in the aspect of the normal reach effect.
Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 82 to 85, when the pattern A is set, the effect mode of the strong SP reach effect (FIG. 82 (f), (g)) and when the pattern B is set Effect mode of strong SP reach effect to be executed (Fig. 83(d), (e)) and effect mode of strong SP reach effect to be executed when pattern C is set (Fig. 84(c), (d)) , and the production mode of the strong SP ready-to-win production executed when pattern D is set (FIGS. 85(e) and (f)) are the same, but pattern A, pattern B, pattern C and pattern D You may change the production|presentation aspect of strong SP reach production|presentation by .

Here, a variation pattern that ends with a strong SP ready-to-win effect will be described.
In this embodiment, at least pattern A (normal → weak SP → strong SP), pattern B (normal → strong SP), pattern C (strong SP) and pattern D (pseudo Four variation patterns (continuous → strong SP) are prepared.
Then, in the special figure fluctuation display game that is the target of the pending change effect that changes to red pending, pattern C is more likely to be selected than pattern A, pattern D is more likely to be selected than pattern C, and patterns A to D. Among them, pattern B is most likely to be selected.

In addition, in the special figure fluctuation display game that is the target of the reservation change effect that changes to blue reservation with a lower expectation than red reservation, pattern A is more likely to be selected than pattern C, and pattern C is selected rather than pattern D. Pattern B is the most likely to be selected among Patterns A to D.
That is, the degree of expectation for a big hit is pattern B<pattern A<pattern C<pattern D
Highest in order of

The game control device 100 transmits a look-ahead command related to the start memory to the effect control device 300 when the start memory is generated. The look-ahead command includes information on the variation pattern corresponding to the start memory of the look-ahead object and information on the stop pattern. This variation pattern is determined with reference to a variation pattern table.
In addition, the game control device 100 sends a variation-related command to the effect control device 30 at the start of the variation display.
Send to 0. The variation command includes information on the variation pattern corresponding to the starting memory to be varied. This variation pattern is also determined with reference to the variation pattern table.

86(a) and (b) show part of the variation pattern table. The table shown in FIG. 86(a) is an example of a losing variation pattern table for the special figure 1 variation display game, and defines the types and selection rates of variation patterns in the normal game state ST1. Moreover, FIG.
) is an example of a jackpot variation pattern table for the special figure 1 variation display game, and defines the types and selection rates of variation patterns in the normal game state ST1.

That is, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 determines that the current game state is the normal game state ST1, the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory to be read ahead is the special figure 1 variation display game, and the special figure If the result of the 1-variation display game is a loss, for example, FIG.
A variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table shown in a), and a look-ahead command including information on the variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control device 300 .
In addition, the game control device 100 determines that the current game state is the normal game state ST1, the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be read ahead is the special figure 1 variation display game, and the special figure 1 variation display game is performed. When the result is a big hit, for example, a variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern table shown in FIG.

In addition, the game control device 100 determines that the current game state is the normal game state ST1, the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the variation target is the special figure 1 variation display game, and the special figure 1 variation display game If the result is a loss, for example, a variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table shown in FIG.
In addition, the game control device 100 determines that the current game state is the normal game state ST1, the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the variation target is the special figure 1 variation display game, and the special figure 1 variation display game When the result is a big hit, for example, a variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern table shown in FIG.

For example, as shown in FIG. 86(a), if the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target is lost, pattern D
Pattern C (strong SP) is less likely to be selected than pattern A (normal→weak SP→strong SP), and pattern B (normal→strong SP) is most likely to be selected. It's becoming Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 86(b), when the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory to be read ahead is a big hit, the selection rates of patterns A to D are the same. That is, the degree of expectation for a big hit is pattern B<pattern A<pattern C
<It becomes higher in the order of pattern D.>
In the example shown in FIG. 86(b), it is possible to select a variation pattern without reach even in a special figure variation display game with a big hit result. It may be configured such that the variation pattern cannot be selected.

Effect control device 300, when receiving a look-ahead command from the game control device 100,
For example, read-ahead variation command processing (step C246) of received command analysis processing (FIG. 80)
), a holding change performance lottery for determining whether or not to execute the holding change performance and the performance mode of the holding change performance is performed. This holding change effect lottery is performed, for example, with reference to a holding change effect distribution table.
FIG. 86(c) shows part of the pending change effect distribution table. The table shown in FIG. 86 (c) is an example of a pending change effect distribution table for special figure 1 variable display game that is referred to when a prefetch system command including information on a change pattern that ends with a strong SP reach effect is received. and
The effect mode and selection rate of the pending change effect in the normal game state ST1 are defined. note that,
When a look-ahead system command including information on a variation pattern ending with a strong SP ready-to-win performance is received, a common pending change performance distribution table is used regardless of the stop pattern information contained in the look-ahead system command.

That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control device 300, the current game state is the normal game state ST1, the received look-ahead command is a look-ahead command containing information of a variation pattern that ends in a strong SP reach effect, If the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be read ahead is the special figure 1 variation display game, even if the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a loss or a big hit, for example, the figure A holding change effect lottery is performed with reference to the holding change effect distribution table shown in 86(c).
Then, when the "first performance mode" is selected in the reservation change performance lottery, the reservation change performance is executed to change the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory to be read ahead into red reservation. In addition, when the "second performance mode" is selected in the reservation change performance lottery, the reservation change performance is executed to change the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory to be read ahead to the blue reservation. Further, when "non-execution" is selected in the holding change performance lottery, the holding change performance for changing the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory to be read ahead is not executed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 86(c), when a look-ahead command including pattern A information is received as a variation pattern ending with a strong SP ready-to-win effect, the "first effect mode" is the least likely to be selected. "Non-execution" is most likely to be selected.
It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, when receiving a look-ahead command containing information on a variation pattern that ends with a strong SP reach effect, a common pending change effect distribution regardless of the result of the special figure variation display game for look-ahead The table (FIG. 86(c)) is used, but even if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game to be read ahead is a big hit and a different pending change effect distribution table is used good.

FIG. 86(d) shows the relationship between the effect mode of the hold change effect and the effect mode of the strong SP reach effect derived from FIGS. 86(a), (b) and 86(c).
For example, as shown in FIGS. 86(a) and (b), a strong SP transmitted from the game control device 100
About 30% of the look-ahead commands including information on the variation pattern that ends with the ready-to-win effect are look-ahead commands that include pattern A information, and about 40% are look-ahead commands that include pattern B information. 20% are look-ahead commands containing pattern C information, and about 1
0% is a read-ahead command including pattern D information.

Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 86(c), when a read-ahead command including pattern A information is received, the "first effect mode" is selected at a rate of 4/30, and the rate is 6/30. , the "second effect mode" is selected, and "non-execution" is selected at a ratio of 20/30. i.e.
About 4% of the look-ahead commands including information on the variation pattern that ends with the strong SP reach effect transmitted from the game control device 100 are look-ahead commands including information on pattern A, and the "first effect mode" is Approximately 6% of prefetch-related commands include pattern A information and the "second rendering mode" is selected, and approximately 20% contain pattern A information. This is a read-ahead command for which "non-execution" is selected.

Therefore, if there is no change in the game state or the like between the transmission of the look-ahead command and the transmission of the variable command, for example, as shown in FIG. In the special figure fluctuation display game, in the strong SP reach production, the strong S of pattern B
The P reach performance is most likely to be executed, the pattern C strong SP reach performance is more likely to be executed than the pattern A strong SP reach performance, and the pattern D strong SP reach performance is more likely to be executed than the pattern C strong SP reach performance. It's becoming
Also, in the special figure fluctuation display game that was targeted for the pending change effect that changes to blue pending,
Among the strong SP reach performances, the pattern B strong SP reach performance is most likely to be executed, the pattern A strong SP reach performance is more likely to be executed than the pattern C strong SP reach performance, and the pattern D strong SP reach performance is more likely to be executed. Also, the strong SP ready-to-win effect of pattern C is likely to be executed.

That is, before the execution of the special figure variation display game in which the variation pattern that ends with the strong SP reach production is set, the look-ahead effect for the special figure variation display game is changed to red suspension with higher expectations than blue suspension. When the holding change effect is performed, as the strong SP reach effect, of the pattern A strong SP reach effect and the pattern C strong SP reach effect, the more expected pattern C strong SP reach effect Among the strong SP ready-to-win effect of pattern C and the strong SP ready-to-win effect of pattern D, the strong SP ready-to-win effect of pattern D, which has a higher degree of expectation, is easier to execute.

In addition, before the execution of the special figure variation display game in which the variation pattern that ends with the strong SP reach effect is set, it changes to blue suspension with lower expectations than red suspension as a look-ahead effect for the special figure variation display game. When the holding change effect is performed, the strong SP reach effect is the pattern A strong SP reach effect with a lower expectation among the pattern A strong SP reach effect and the pattern C strong SP reach effect. Among the strong SP ready-to-win effect of pattern C and the strong SP ready-to-win effect of pattern D, the strong SP ready-to-win effect of pattern C, which has a lower degree of expectation, is more likely to be executed.
Thus, in the present embodiment, according to the production mode of the strong SP reach production (the process of developing into the strong SP reach production), the production of the notice production (forecast production) performed before the strong SP reach production. Aspects can be divided.

As the look-ahead effect, when the hold change effect of changing to red hold is performed, the expectation that the strong SP ready-to-win effect is executed is higher than when the hold change effect of changing to blue hold is performed. . Therefore, when the hold change production that changes to red hold is performed, if the strong SP reach production of pattern A that passes through the normal reach and the weak SP reach is executed, a feeling of dullness and boredom will occur, and the interest of the reach production will decrease. There is a risk of it happening. In contrast, in this embodiment,
When the hold change production that changes to red hold is performed, the pattern A strong SP reach production is the most difficult to execute among the strong SP reach productions, so the feeling of boredom and boredom is reduced, and the reach is reduced. It is possible to enhance the interest of the performance.

Pattern C where a strong SP reach is suddenly generated for the most easily executed strong SP reach
, it is possible to effectively reduce the sense of boredom and boredom.
However, since the strong SP reach effect of pattern C has the shortest fluctuation time among the strong SP reach effects (see FIGS. 86(a) and (b)), if the selection rate of the strong SP reach effect of pattern C is increased, There is a risk that the number of prize balls paid out per unit time will be too large. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the look-ahead effect, even when a hold change effect that changes to red hold is performed,
Even when a hold change effect that changes to blue hold is performed, the fluctuation time is shorter than pattern A,
Since the strong SP ready-to-win performance of pattern B, whose fluctuation time is longer than that of pattern C, is most easily executed among the strong SP ready-to-win performances, the number of payout balls per unit time does not become too large. .

Further, the strong SP ready-to-win effect of pattern D is different from the strong SP ready-to-win effect of other patterns in that a pseudo-continuous change occurs, so that it feels special. Then, in this embodiment, the strength S of the pattern D
The P reach production is easier to execute after the hold change production that changes to red hold, which has a higher degree of expectation, is performed, out of the hold change production that changes to red hold and the hold change production that changes to blue hold ( See FIG. 86(d)). Therefore, a special strong S
Since it is possible to execute P reach production (that is, pattern D strong SP reach production),
It is possible to meet the expectations of the players, to further increase the expectations, and to increase the interest of the ready-to-win performance.

Of course, before the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game in which the variation pattern that ends with a weak SP reach production is set, a hold change production that changes to blue hold or red hold is performed as a look-ahead production for the special figure fluctuation display game. It may be done, and before the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game in which the variation pattern that ends with the normal reach production is set, as a look-ahead production for the special figure fluctuation display game Hold that changes to blue hold or red hold In some cases, a change effect is performed, and before the execution of the special figure variation display game in which the variation pattern without reach is set, it changes to blue hold or red hold as a look-ahead effect for the special figure variation display game. A pending change effect may be performed.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (
A variation pattern selection means ( A game control device 100) and a variation effect means (performance control device 300) that executes a variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means, and the variation effect means is a first reach effect (normal reach production) and the second reach production (weak S
Pre-reach performance) and a third reach performance (strong SP reach performance) can be executed, and the variation pattern selection means selects a variation pattern for executing the third reach performance (variation pattern ending with strong SP reach performance). , the second reach effect is executed after the execution of the first reach effect, and the second
A first pattern (pattern A) that executes the third reach effect after executing the reach effect, and a second pattern (pattern A) that executes the third reach effect without executing the second reach effect after the execution of the first reach effect. B) and a third pattern (pattern C) in which the third reach effect is executed without executing the first reach effect and the second reach effect, and the first pattern, the second pattern and the third pattern are selectable. Among the patterns, the variation pattern with the highest degree of expectation that the result of the game will be a special result is the third pattern, and the variation pattern with the lowest degree of expectation that the result of the game will be a special result is the second pattern (Fig. 86 See (a), (b)).
That is, the variation pattern with the highest degree of expectation among the first pattern (pattern A), the second pattern (pattern B) and the third pattern (pattern C) is the third variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Therefore, it is possible to quickly suggest that the degree of expectation is high, and thus it is possible to increase the interest of the ready-to-win presentation.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is the advance notice effect means (the effect control device 300) for executing the notice effect (forecast effect) that suggests the degree of expectation that the result will be a special result. ), and the effect mode of the advance notice effect includes a first effect mode (e.g., red hold) and a second effect mode (e.g., blue hold) with a lower suggestible expectation than the first effect mode, When the effect mode of the notice effect is the first effect mode, the third pattern (pattern C) is more likely to be selected than the first pattern (pattern A) as the variation pattern of the game targeted for the notice effect, and the notice effect is performed. When the performance mode of the performance is the second performance mode, the first pattern (pattern A) is more likely to be selected than the third pattern (pattern C) as the variation pattern of the game to be the subject of the announcement performance. (See FIG. 86(d)).
By configuring in this way, when the advance notice effect of the first effect mode with a higher degree of expectation (for example, a hold change effect that changes to a red hold) is performed, the first reach effect (normal reach effect) is performed.
And the third pattern (pattern C) which does not undergo the first ready-to-reach effect and the second ready-to-win effect is more likely to be selected than the first pattern (pattern A) which undergoes the second ready-to-win effect (weak SP ready-to-win effect). Therefore, the feeling of sluggishness and boredom can be reduced, and the interest of the ready-to-win presentation can be enhanced.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the effect mode of the notice effect (prefetch effect) is the first effect mode (for example, red hold), the game (special figure fluctuation The second pattern (pattern B) is more likely to be selected than the third pattern (pattern C) as the variation pattern of the display game), and when the effect mode of the advance notice effect is the second effect mode (for example, blue hold), the It is possible to configure such that the second pattern (pattern B) is more likely to be selected than the first pattern (pattern A) as the variation pattern of the game to be the target of the notice effect (see FIG. 86(d)).
By configuring in this way, the second pattern (pattern B ) are most likely to be selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of prize balls to be paid out per unit time from becoming too large while reducing the feeling of boredom and boredom.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game (special figure variation display game) in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed is executed, and when the result of the game is a special result, the game is advantageous to the player. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state, a variation pattern selection means (game control device 100) for selecting a game variation pattern, and a variation performance for executing a variation performance corresponding to the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means. Means (production control device 300) and
The variable performance means simulates a ready-to-win performance in which a ready-to-win state in which the result can be a special result depending on the identification information stopped and displayed at the end is displayed as a performance, and a variable display of the identification information for a plurality of times in one game. and a pseudo-continuous effect capable of executing a pseudo-variation display, and the variation pattern selection means selects the specific reach as a variation pattern for executing a specific reach effect (variation pattern ending with a strong SP reach effect). A first pattern (pattern A or pattern B) that executes the specific reach effect after execution of a reach effect (normal reach effect or weak SP reach effect) different from the effect (strong SP reach effect), and after execution of the pseudo continuous effect A second pattern (pattern D) that executes the specific ready-to-reach effect, and a third pattern (pattern C ) and can be selected, and among the first, second and third patterns, the second pattern is the variation pattern with the highest degree of expectation that the result of the game will be a special result,
The variation pattern with the lowest degree of expectation that the result of the game will be a special result is the first pattern (see FIGS. 86(a) and 86(b)).
That is, among the variation patterns that execute a specific reach effect (variation pattern that ends with a strong SP reach effect), the variation pattern with the highest degree of expectation is the second pattern ( Pattern D). Therefore, since it can be suggested that the degree of expectation is high with a special variation pattern, it is possible to increase the interest of the ready-to-win effect.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is the advance notice effect means (the effect control device 300) for executing the notice effect (forecast effect) that suggests the degree of expectation that the result will be a special result. ), and the effect mode of the advance notice effect includes a first effect mode (e.g., red hold) and a second effect mode (e.g., blue hold) with a lower suggestible expectation than the first effect mode, When the effect mode of the notice effect is the first effect mode, the second pattern (pattern D) is more likely to be selected than the third pattern (pattern C) as the variation pattern of the game targeted for the notice effect, and the notice effect is performed. When the performance mode of the performance is the second performance mode, the third pattern (pattern C) is more likely to be selected than the second pattern (pattern D) as the variation pattern of the game to be the subject of the announcement performance. (See FIG. 86(d)).
By configuring in this way, when the advance notice effect of the first effect mode with a higher degree of expectation (for example, a hold change effect that changes to a red hold) is performed, a pseudo-continuous effect that is not executed in other patterns is performed. The second pattern (pattern D) is more likely to be selected. Therefore, it is possible to meet the expectation of the player and further increase the expectation, thereby enhancing the interest of the ready-to-win effect.

In addition, the notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the result of the game (special figure fluctuation display game) will be a special result is not limited to the notice effect (forecast effect) performed before the execution of the game, but during the execution of the game It may be a foreshadowing performance to be performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect mode of the ready-to-win effect performed in the game is distributed according to the effect mode of the advance notice effect performed before the game is executed. The ready-to-win effect performed in the game may be distributed according to the effect mode of the advance notice effect performed during the first half fluctuation (during the fluctuation before the start of the ready-to-win).

Specifically, for example, during the first half of the fluctuation, as the advance notice effects, a step-up effect of a first effect mode (for example, a step-up effect ending in three stages) and a second effect with a lower expectation level than the first effect mode. A step-up effect (for example, a step-up effect that ends in one stage) can be executed, and the effect mode of the strong SP reach effect (strong SP reach effect (process until development), the effect mode of the advance notice effect (step-up effect) to be performed before the strong SP ready-to-win effect may be distributed.

Alternatively, for example, during the first half of the fluctuation, as the advance notice effects, a pseudo-continuous effect of the first effect mode (a pseudo-continuous effect in which the number of times of the re-fluctuation effect is three times) and a second effect with a lower expectation than the first effect mode. A pseudo-continuous effect (a pseudo-continuous effect in which the number of re-variation effects is one) can be executed, for example, as shown in FIG.
(d) so that the relationship shown in (d), according to the production mode of the strong SP reach production (the process until it develops into a strong SP reach production), the notice production performed before the strong SP reach production (pseudo continuous Effect) may be distributed according to the effect mode.

It should be noted that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above-described embodiment, and may be other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, majang ball gaming machines, and the like. can be applied to all gaming machines that use game balls. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. The slot machines are not limited to slot machines using medals, but include all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

10 game machine 23 lower tray (reservoir)
25 production button (operation part)
100 game control device (fluctuation pattern selection means)
153 upper plate unit (operating means)
232 ball outlet (through hole)
233 Open/close door (open/close member)
252d LED board (substrate)
252e Front guide recess (guide means)
252f left guiding recess (guiding means)
252g right guiding recess (guiding means)
258b groove (guiding means)
267a first front reservoir (delay means)
268a first left reservoir (delay means)
269a first right reservoir (delay means)
300 production control device (fluctuation production means, notice production means)
D22, D23 Distance D3 Diameter (width of through-hole)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing a game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information and generating a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result,
Variation pattern selection means for selecting a variation pattern of the game;
a variation effect means for executing a variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means;
The variable effect means is capable of executing a first ready-to-reach effect, a second ready-to-reach effect, and a third ready-to-reach effect,
The variation pattern selection means is
A first pattern in which the second ready-to-win effect is executed after the first ready-to-win effect is executed, and the third ready-to-win effect is executed after the second ready-to-win effect is executed;
A second pattern of executing the third ready-to-reach effect without executing the second ready-to-reach effect after executing the first ready-to-reach effect;
A third pattern for executing the third ready-to-reach effect without executing the first ready-to-reach effect and the second ready-to-reach effect,
It is possible to select a fourth pattern in which the second ready-to-win effect is executed without executing the first ready-to-win effect and the third ready-to-win effect is not executed after the second ready-to-win effect is executed,
The degree of expectation that the result of the game will be a special result is different in the first pattern, the second pattern, the third pattern, and the fourth pattern ,
A gaming machine, wherein the degree of expectation of the third pattern is set higher than that of the first pattern, and the degree of expectation of the fourth pattern is set lower than that of the first pattern.

Images